三藏之路 Tipitaka Path
巴利三藏 · 巴利语翻译标准中译
首页随附论藏随附其他随附Kathāvatthupakaraṇa-anu复注

Kathāvatthupakaraṇa-anuṭīkā · Kathāvatthupakaraṇa-anu复注

298 段 · CSCD 巴利原典
Kathāvatthupakaraṇa-anuṭīkā《论事论再注》
Ganthārambhavaṇṇanā著作开端注释
Samudāye ekadesā antogadhāti samudāyo tesaṃ adhiṭṭhānabhāvena vutto yathā ‘‘rukkhe sākhā’’ti dasseti ‘‘kathāsamudāyassā’’tiādinā. Tattha kathānanti tisso kathā vādo jappo vitaṇḍāti. Tesu yena pamāṇatakkehi pakkhapaṭipakkhānaṃ patiṭṭhāpanapaṭikkhepā honti, so vādo. Ekādhikaraṇā hi aññamaññaviruddhā dhammā pakkhapaṭipakkhā yathā ‘‘hoti tathāgato paraṃ maraṇā, na hoti tathāgato paraṃ maraṇā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.65). Nānādhikaraṇā pana aññamaññaviruddhāpi pakkhapaṭipakkhā nāma na honti yathā ‘‘aniccaṃ rūpaṃ, niccaṃ nibbāna’’nti. Yena chalajātiniggahaṭṭhānehi pakkhapaṭipakkhānaṃ patiṭṭhāpanaṃ paṭikkhepārambho, so jappo. Ārambhamattamevettha, na atthasiddhīti dassanatthaṃ ārambhaggahaṇaṃ. Yāya pana chalajātiniggahaṭṭhānehi paṭipakkhapaṭikkhepāya vāyamanti, sā vitaṇḍā. Tattha atthavikappupapattiyā vacanavighāto chalaṃ yathā ‘‘navakambaloyaṃ puriso, rājā no sakkhī’’ti evamādi . Dūsanabhāsā jātayo, uttarapatirūpakāti attho. Niggahaṭṭhānāni parato āvi bhavissanti. Evaṃ vādajappavitaṇḍappabhedāsu tīsu kathāsu idha vādakathā ‘‘kathā’’ti adhippetā. Sā ca kho aviparītadhammatāya patiṭṭhāpanavasena, na viggāhikakathābhāvenāti veditabbaṃ. Mātikāṭhapanenevāti uddesadesanāya eva. Ṭhapitassāti desitassa. Desanā hi desetabbamatthaṃ vineyyasantānesu ṭhapanato nikkhipanato ṭhapanaṃ, nikkhepoti ca vuccati.
“集起”这一处说“集起”是指依其所立根故说起,譬如“树上枝叶”之类,称之为“话集”等等。此中“话”指三种:“言说”“辩论”“颂诵”“诽谤”。其中以根据不同量度建立对立肯定或否定者是“辩论”。如“一处就某一事物相违者”即辩论,如“如来之后必死”“如来之后不死”等(《增一》一章65)。而不同主题虽然相互对立,却无对立肯定或否定,如“无常色”“常涅槃”者,即无对立肯定否定,此乃“颂诵”。依靠变迁之处建立对立肯定或否定者,开始颂诵。只是开始之义,非证成之义。由变迁之处反对对立否定而努力者,即是“诽谤”。其处以议论生义错乱、语意动摇,如“此人破布,不可信而为王”等等,乃恶语诽谤。此类借助语义、建地之手法产生的辩论、颂诵、诽谤三说,这里将论辩说属性标为“话”。此乃仅以建立相反相成义理为本,不是表达真义,亦非辩法之说。因只为解说提纲而立。所谓“立者”即“说者”,说即要宣说应说之法,乃于维系种姓中置入、纳入,即称为“立”,同时亦曰“纳入”。
Ganthārambhavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 著作开端注释完毕。
Nidānakathāvaṇṇanā因缘叙述注释
Parinibbānameva…pe… vuttaṃ. Abhinnasabhāvampi hi atthaṃ tadaññadhammato visesāvabodhanatthaṃ aññaṃ viya katvā voharanti yathā ‘‘attano sabhāvaṃ dhārentīti dhammā’’ti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 1). Sāti asaṅkhatā dhātu. Karaṇabhāvena vuttā yathāvuttassa upasamassa sādhakatamabhāvaṃ sandhāya. Dhammavādī…pe… dubbalatā vuttā tathārūpāya paññāya bhāve tādisānaṃ pakkhabhāvābhāvato. Laddhiyāti ‘‘atthi puggalo saccikaṭṭhaparamatthena, parihāyati arahā arahattā’’tiādiladdhiyā. Suttantehīti devatāsaṃyuttādīhi. Liṅgākappabhedaṃ parato sayameva vakkhati.
此中关于“般涅槃”……等所说。即使性质本质相同,乃为通达法义之别解而作分别运用,譬如“诸法持自性”等(《法集阿阇黎法》卷一)。“质”是无量境界。以作为因缘则能生发所说之安稳功用。关于法的说者……其所说的智慧功能,因智慧之有无而异。所谓“已得智慧”即“有人确实以真理为立足点,使阿拉汉断尽烦恼得果”等的各类智慧。此乃依契经、天众相应等所说。关于差别记号的说明,接着由作者自述。
Bhinditvā mūlasaṅgahanti mūlasaṅgītiṃ vināsetvā, bhedaṃ vā katvā yathā sā ṭhitā, tato aññathā katvā. Saṅgahitato vā aññatrāti mūlasaṅgītiyā saṅgahitato aññatra. Tenāha ‘‘asaṅgahitaṃ sutta’’nti. Nītatthaṃ yathārutavasena viññeyyatthattā. Neyyatthaṃ vipariṇāmadukkhatādivasena niddhāretabbatthattā. Tīhi ṭhānehīti ‘‘sūrā satimanto idha brahmacariyavāso’’ti (a. ni. 9.21) evaṃ vuttehi tīhi kāraṇehi. Aññaṃ sandhāya bhaṇitanti ekaṃ pabbajjāsaṅkhātaṃ brahmacariyavāsaṃ sandhāya bhaṇitaṃ. Aññaṃ atthaṃ ṭhapayiṃsūti sabbassapi brahmacariyavāsassa vasena ‘‘natthi devesu brahmacariyavāso’’tiādikaṃ (kathā. 269) aññaṃ atthaṃ ṭhapayiṃsu. Suttañca aññaṃ sandhāya bhaṇitaṃ tato aññaṃ sandhāya bhaṇitaṃ katvā ṭhapayiṃsu, tassa atthañca aññaṃ ṭhapayiṃsūti evamettha yojanā veditabbā. Suññatādīti ādi-saddena aniccatādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
所谓“破碎根合”,即毁坏“根合”,或分断、或废除。根合者,谓合为根本,不同者谓非根合。故谓“未合经文”。其义明了,表法应依教理。其义不可,因序列变化、痛苦等原因而应舍弃的道理须明。所谓“三处”,即《念处经》曰“智者此处修行”,依此三因缘说。依他一义说,有说者称为“出家名言的修行”。又有说法,以所有出家生活为缘,“诸天中无修行者”等义,批驳此义。经中另有所指依次舍弃,次第舍弃而立,故在此辨析安排。所谓“空”字等,是以无常等诸义数计。
Gambhīraṃ ekadesaṃ mahāpadesaparivārādiṃ. Ekacce sakalaṃ abhidhammaṃ vissajjiṃsu chaḍḍayiṃsu seyyathāpi suttantikā. Te hi taṃ na jinavacananti vadanti. Kathāvatthussa savivādattetiādi heṭṭhā nidānaṭṭhakathāya āgatanayaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Keci pana puggalapaññattiyāpi savivādattaṃ maññanti. ‘‘Tatiyasaṅgītito pubbe pavattamānānaṃ vasenā’’ti idaṃ kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu tatiyasaṅgītito pubbepi taṃ mātikārūpena pavattateva? Niddesaṃ vā sandhāya tathā vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Aññānīti aññākārāni abhidhammapakaraṇādīni akariṃsu, pavattantānipi tāni aññathā katvā paṭhiṃsūti attho . Mañjusirīti idaṃ kasmā vuttaṃ. Na hi taṃ nāmaṃ piṭakattayaṃ anuvattantehi bhikkhūhi gayhati? Itarehi gayhamānampi vā sāsanikapariññehi na sāsanāvacaraṃ gayhatīti katvā vuttaṃ. Nikāyanāmanti mahāsaṅghikādinikāyanāmaṃ, duttaguttādivagganāmañca.
深广的“一处”,是大部注释类作品之首领。有些全著舍弃 Abhidhamma,只采纳经文部。此等不谓为正说,而谓为说道境义。此中“话义种种紊乱”等下缘,是释义论书中所来说明。有人认为个别词义也有紊乱。所谓“第三唱”,是一开始的唱,如“早期唱辞”说等,为何如此说?盖论旨与释义所指,是作为别文献为标记的。又说他类不理 Abhidhamma 章节而创作,而后又以他义反对诸说。所谓“曼珠士”,为何如此称为名?此名并非为三藏经文行者所承传记载。或他传承者及后代释义者亦不顺应教义记载而作。章节名,谓为大众传统所传之部与别群名等。
Saṅkantikānaṃ bhedo suttavādīti saṅkantikānaṃ anantare eko nikāyabhedo suttavādī nāma bhijjittha. Sahāti ekajjhaṃ katvā, gaṇiyamānāti attho.
关于疑难区别谓“经说分”者,即疑难之一类,乃因有一派被称为经说分别者。此“经说分”与“归类”之意。
Uppanne vāde sandhāyāti tatiyasaṅgītikāle uppanne vāde sandhāya. Uppajjanaketi tato paṭṭhāya yāva saddhammantaradhānā etthantare uppajjanake. Suttasahassāharaṇañcettha paravādabhañjanatthañca sakavādapatiṭṭhāpanatthañca. Suttekadesopi hi ‘‘sutta’’nti vuccati samudāyavohārassa avayavesupi dissanato yathā ‘‘paṭo daḍḍho, samuddo diṭṭho’’ti ca. Te panettha suttapadesā ‘‘atthi puggalo attahitāya paṭipanno’’tiādinā āgatā veditabbā.
“论及生起时”所论,即第三唱时所生起的论题节点。所谓“生起”,乃至于正法灭失时所谓消失、并破坏他人论点及确立我方论点之意。即使只有一经,也称为“经”,此谓经文部的由来,如“岸已牢,海已见”等。此等“经”指“有人为自身利益而修行”等意思。
Nidānakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 因缘叙述注释完毕。
Mahāvaggo
大品
1. Puggalakathā一、人论事
1. Suddhasaccikaṭṭho一、纯粹真实义
1. Anulomapaccanīkavaṇṇanā
第一节 依次前后相承的解说
§1
1. Sambarādīhi pakappitavijjā, tathābhisaṅkhatāni osadhāni ca ‘‘māyā’’ti vuccanti, idha pana māyāya āhitavisesā abhūtaññeyyākārā adhippetāti dassento ‘‘māyāya amaṇiādayo maṇiādiākārena dissamānā māyāti vuttā’’ti āha. Saccaññeva saccikaṃ, so eva attho aviparītassa ñāṇassa visayabhāvaṭṭhenāti saccikaṭṭho. Tenāha ‘‘bhūtaṭṭho’’ti. Aviparītabhāvato eva paramo padhāno atthoti paramattho, ñāṇassa paccakkhabhūto dhammānaṃ aniddisitabbasabhāvo. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘uttamattho’’ti.
〔第一节〕由琐罗门萨婆多及其弟子等而提出的知识,以及由此所依止的药方,称为“魔”。但此处所说“魔”者,指借助魔的特质而显现的非实体的现象,作为主导者。为此举例说:“借助魔,因宝石等形态显现,而称之为魔”。真理自是真理,依真理而存在事物才是无误的认识之对象,因此称为真实所依。故称为“存在所依”。正因为其不变之性是根本原则,也说为根本义,是真理本体,由此也称为其为“最高义”。
Atthīti vacanasāmaññenāti ‘‘atthi puggalo attahitāya paṭipanno’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.96; kathā. 22) ‘‘atthī’’ti pavattavacanasāmaññena. Atthavikappupapattiyā vacanavighāto chalanti vadanti. Patiṭṭhaṃ pacchindantoti hetuṃ dūsento, ahetuṃ karontoti attho. Hetu hi paṭiññāya patiṭṭhāpanato patiṭṭhā, taṃ pana hetuṃ atthamattato dassento ‘‘yadi saccikaṭṭhenā’’tiādimāha. Payogato pana dūsanena saddhiṃ parato āvi bhavissati. Okāsaṃ adadamānoti yathānurūpaṃ yuttiṃ vattuṃ avasaraṃ adento. Atha vā patiṭṭhaṃ pacchindanto, paṭiññaṃ eva parivattentoti attho. Upalabbhati puggaloti hi sakavādiṃ uddissa paravādino paṭiññāva na yuttā appasiddhattā visesitabbassa. Tenevāha ‘‘anupalabbhaneyyato na tava vādo tiṭṭhatīti nivattento’’ti. Rūpañca upalabbhati…pe… dassetīti etena paravādinā adhippetahetuno viparītatthasādhakattaṃ dasseti.
“义”一词,在言辞上泛指“世间实行利益个人者”等(依《增支部》4.96,《论议经》22),是“一切所传达之义”之谓。释义者因对义判断及领会有偏差而存在语言上的歧义。有说因立场尚未明证而后退,此为因;有说因不怀原因而作此解;原因乃因确认而设立基石,因而言“若以真实为依”诸语。实践时即使被诋毁,终究也应与他人同在。也说“不与时机、合理谬误相合”而拒绝契合。又说“后退于既立”、“指出违背契约”等义。因其可被知晓,故谓之领悟。此处即谓“依真实所依的至上原则”而能被个人悟得,如是解答第二询问。对论者反驳时指出对立原因的诡辩,显现其相反义的诡计。
Upalabbhamānaṃ nāma hotīti ākārato taṃākāravantānaṃ anaññattāti adhippāyo. Aññathāti ākāra, ākāravantānaṃ bhede. Etissāti ‘‘tato so puggalo upalabbhati saccikaṭṭhaparamaṭṭhenā’’ti evaṃ vuttāya dutiyapucchāya. Esa visesoti yo yathāvutto dvinnaṃ pucchānaṃ visayassa sabhāvākārabhedo, esa dvinnaṃ pucchānaṃ viseso. Sabhāvadhammānaṃ sāmaññalakkhaṇena abhinnānampi salakkhaṇato bhedoyevāti aññadhammassa aññenākārena na kadācipi upalabbho bhaveyya. Yadi siyā, aññattameva na siyāti ruppanādisapaccayādiākārena anupalabbhamānopi puggalo attano bhūtasabhāvaṭṭhena upalabbhatevāti vadantaṃ paravādinaṃ pati ‘‘yo saccikaṭṭho’’tiādi codanā anokāsāti dassento āha ‘‘yathā pana…pe… niggaho ca na kātabbo’’ti. Tattha niggahoti ‘‘ājānāhi niggaha’’nti evaṃ vuttaniggaho, parājayāropanena paravādino niggaṇhananti attho.
“可被领悟”者,即标示本体而言该形态有别其他形态的非一致性。意指不同,是指形态、形态者之间的不一致。此例中称“于是该人依真实的最高义而被领悟”,以此回答第二询问。所谓区别,乃是对某两询问句的主旨及本质形态的差异,此为两询问句的区别。虽属本质法,因其共有特点亦难形成差别。不可有某种不同的形态等类缘起而使不可感知,但论者称:“你不承认不可感知,故论不能成立”,此时告诫论者:“如实而言,不应做无益的反驳”,其“缚”即意为以已知理由拘缚,论者用抵赖刚好陷于败诉,称为缚闭。
Svāyaṃ pana yasmā tassa vādāparādhahetuko, tasmā taṃ dassetuṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ dosāparādhapariyāyehi vibhāvito. Avajānanañhettha niggahaṭṭhānaṃ. Tathā hi paṭiññāhāni, paṭiññāntaraṃ, paṭiññāvirodho, paṭiññāsaññāso, hetvantaraṃ, atthantaraṃ, niratthakaṃ, aviññātatthaṃ, asambandhatthaṃ, appattakālaṃ, ūnaṃ, adhikaṃ, punaruttaṃ, ananubhāsanaṃ, aviññātaṃ, appaṭibhā, vikkhepo, matānuññā, anuyuñjitabbassa upekkhanaṃ, ananuyuñjitabbassa anuyogo, apasiddhantaraṃ, hetvābhāsā cāti dvāvīsati niggahaṭṭhānāni ñāyavādino vadanti.
既然正是因你自身而起论辩过失,故在此注疏中诸种罪过因果分别详述。此不敬即缚闭之所在。如弃真理的请求、请求之改动、请求之抵触、请求断绝、原因不同、意义不同、无意义、不被理解、不相联贯、不合宜时候、过少、过多、重复、不能理解、不能表述、动摇、错误知见、应该放弃的漠视、不应放弃的依附、对失败的追求、伪证等计二十一种缚闭罪过,论者皆称之。
Tattha visadisūdāharaṇadhammānujānanaṃ paṭhamudāharaṇe paṭiññāhāni. Paṭiññātatthapaṭisedhe tadaññatthaniddeso paṭiññāntaraṃ. Paṭiññāviruddhahetukittanaṃ paṭiññāvirodho. Paṭiññātatthāpanayanaṃ paṭiññāsaññāso. Avisesavutte hetumhi paṭisiddhe visesahetukathanaṃ hetvantaraṃ. Adhikatatthānupayogiatthakathanaṃ atthantaraṃ. Mātikāpāṭho viya atthahīnaṃ niratthakaṃ. Tikkhattuṃ vuttampi sakkhipaṭivādīhi aviditaṃ aviññātatthaṃ. Pubbāparavasena sambandharahitaṃ asambandhatthaṃ. Avayavavipallāsavacanaṃ appattakālaṃ. Avayavavikalaṃ ūnaṃ. Adhikahetūdāharaṇaṃ adhikaṃ. Ṭhapetvā anuvādaṃ saddatthānaṃ punappunaṃ vacanaṃ atthāpannavacanañca punaruttaṃ. Parisāya viditassa tīhi vuttassa apaccudāhāro ananubhāsanaṃ. Yaṃ vādinā vuttaṃ parisāya viññātaṃ paṭivādinā duviññātaṃ, taṃ aviññātaṃ. Taṃvādinā vattabbe vutte paravādino paṭivacanassa anupaṭṭhānaṃ appaṭibhā. Kiccantarappasaṅgena kathāvicchindanaṃ vikkhepo. Attano dosānujānanena parapakkhassa dosappasañjanaṃ paramatānujānanaṃ matānuññā. Niggahappattassa niggaṇhanaṃ anuyuñjitabbassa upekkhanaṃ. Sampattaniggahassa aniggahaṭṭhāne ca niggaṇhanaṃ anuyuñjitabbassa anuyogo. Ekaṃ siddhantamanujānitvā aniyamato tadaññasiddhantakathāppasañjanaṃ apasiddhantaraṃ. Asiddhā anekantikā viruddhā ca hetvābhāsā, hetupatirūpakāti attho. Tesañca kathanaṃ niggahaṭṭhānanti.
关于清楚阐明与示现事理的例证,首先讲述宣示。针对宣示义理的反对,称为宣示差异。若理由与宣示相违,谓之宣示不违。确立宣示意义即宣示概念。若对某理由特别不适用而被否定,则说明特殊理由,称之理由差异。对于超过义理范围之说,是义理差异。如同目录章节非义理,属无义废事。虽被指出亦如辩论者所述,本义未明不显。前后渐次且无联系,内容无联贯。词语成分混乱,时机不当。缺乏成分,甚微不全。过多理由例证则累赘。设定并用通译与义理之词反复陈述。即使对于已知团体与三种说法,缺乏说明,未能相应展开。辩论者所言已被团体了解,对立方则不理解,是未知。论者所言必须明白,群体方知,有言说而缺乏支持,无法理解。由业务无关语句影响辩论,扰乱论述。自承过失导致他方过失增生,论断聚合亦错误。应遵守限制,兼顾威严,凡遭纠缠之事应冷静对待。已定之理一经理解,若出现无序或因果不明,则导致不同理说受污染之害,形成错误论点。所谓未定之处即为此。此分别即为论点形成之基础。
Imesu dvāvīsatiyā niggahaṭṭhānesu idaṃ paṭiññāya apanayanato sayameva paccakkhānato paṭiññāsaññāso nāma niggahaṭṭhānaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘avajānaneneva niggahaṃ dassetī’’ti. Asiddhattāti etena paccakkhato anumānato ca puggalassa anupalabbhamāha. Na hi so paccakkhato upalabbhati. Yadi upalabbheyya, vivādo eva na siyā, anumānampi tādisaṃ natthi, yena puggalaṃ anumineyyuṃ. Tathā hi taṃ sāsaniko puggalavādī vadeyya ‘‘puggalo upalabbhati, atthi puggalo’’ti bhagavatā vuttattā rūpavedanādi viya. Yañhi bhagavatā ‘‘atthī’’ti yadi vuttaṃ, taṃ paramatthato atthi yathā taṃ rūpaṃ vedanā saññā saṅkhārā viññāṇaṃ. Yaṃ pana paramatthato natthi, na taṃ bhagavatā ‘‘atthī’’ti vuttaṃ yathā taṃ pakativādiādīnaṃ pakatiādīti, taṃ micchā. Ettha hi yadi vohārato puggalassa atthibhāvo adhippeto, siddhaṃ sādhanaṃ, atha paramatthato, asiddho hetu tathā avuttattā. Viruddho ca tassa aniccasaṅkhatapaṭiccasamuppannādibhāvāsādhanato rūpavedanādīsu tathā diṭṭhattātiādinā tassa ahetukabhāvasseva pākaṭabhāvato.
在此二十一条限定处,由宣示推动之即为宣示概念。正如教中云:“仅仅由于无知即显示出限定。”所谓未定,即从现前推断个体未见。实则个体不现前。若显现,则不生纷争。亦无可据以推断之法得知个体。依教法论者如此言:“个体现前,故有个体。”此为世尊所示形态感受等之义。若世尊言“有”者,是指真实存在,如色、受、想、行、识。若真实不存在,则世尊不会云“有”,此如同论敌等之讹误。若从语义认为个体实有,且此为证成之事,则自犯矛盾。真实理义若悉遵无常及缘起等,亦应认为感受等无因性。
Yaṃ pana bāhirakā puthu aññatitthiyā vadanti. Attheva ca paramatthato attā ñāṇābhidhānassa pavattiyā nimittabhāvato rūpādi viya. Atha vā attātirittapadatthantaro rūpakkhandho khandhasabhāvattā yathā taṃ itarakkhandhā. Yañhettha padatthantaraṃ, so puggaloti adhippāyo.
外传异教徒所说句句,实质上真理本相是自我觉知、智慧称谓的体现,犹如色等。若句意有别,乃受色蕴身之性质限制,犹如他蕴之异。若句意不同,则以其为个体之主张。
Ettha ca purimassa hetuno paññattiyā anekantikatā asiddhatā ca. Na hi asato sakavādinaṃ pati paramatthato ñāṇābhidhānappavattiyā nimittabhāvo sijjhati. Vohārato ce, tadasiddhasādhanatā rūpādisabhāvavinimuttarūpopi puggalo na hotīti evamādiviruddhatthatā. Pacchimassa pana hetuno sādhetabbatthasāmaññapariggahe siddhasādhanatā, rūpakkhandhato padatthantarato paramatthantarabhūtavedanādisambhavassa icchitattā ca. Tabbisesapariggahe ca sakavādinaṃ pati udāharaṇābhāvo paraparikappitajīvapadatthavirahato. Itarakkhandhānaṃ vedanādivinimuttaubhayasiddhajīvapadatthasahitopi rūpakkhandho na hoti itarakkhandhā viyāti viruddhatthatā ca.
关于前者理据,则说明多元,未证成立。因非真实,异说者对个体真实的智慧称谓发起作用无能。论者若主张,则制止其波动,即使与色蕴等俱已解脱之体无个体,亦表矛盾。后者理据则为普遍接受之成就,色蕴内句义之间及其真实感受等发生之意愿。以特殊分析见,异说者无个体举例,亦无对他法取舍生活字句断绝的例证。对于他蕴感受等解脱之双重成就者尽管色蕴存在,非他蕴则不能成蕴,故表矛盾。
Yaṃ pana kāṇādā ‘‘sukhādīnaṃ nissayabhāvato’’ti anumānaṃ vadanti, te idaṃ vattabbā – kiṃ sukhādīnaṃ attani paṭibaddhaṃ yato sukhādinissayatāya attā anumīyati. Yadi uppādo, evaṃ sante sabbepi sukhādayo ekato eva bhaveyyuṃ kāraṇassa sannihitabhāvato aññanirapekkhato ca. Atha aññampi kiñci indriyādikāraṇantaramapekkhitabbaṃ, tadeva hotu kāraṇaṃ, kimaññena adiṭṭhasāmatthiyena parikappitena payojanaṃ. Atha pana tesaṃ attādhīnā vuttīti vadeyyuṃ, evampi na sijjhati udāharaṇābhāvato. Na hi rūpādivinimutto tādiso koci sabhāvadhammo sukhādisannissayabhūto atthi, yato attano attatthasiddhiyā udāharaṇaṃ apadiseyyuṃ. Iminā nayena asamāsapadābhidheyyattātiādīnampi ayuttattā nivāretabbā. Tathā ‘‘aññassa saccikaṭṭhassa asiddhattā’’ti iminā ca pakatiaṇuādīnampi bāhiraparikappitānaṃ asiddhatā vuttāvāti veditabbā. Kathaṃ pana tesaṃ asiddhīti? Pamāṇena anupalabbhanato. Na hi paccakkhato pakati siddhā kapilassapi isino tassa apaccakkhabhāvassa kāpilehi anuññāyamānattā.
有人对“以眼等为安乐之所依”推断,必须指出此:为何安乐等依赖自我?若安乐依赖,则安乐应因缘俱足而统一,彼此不相倚赖。又若依赖于他感官之外之因,则任其发生,成为因。若再言其属于自我,则亦不成立,缺乏例证。因为如色等无依无附,自然不存在依赖安乐等之真实现象,因无法以例证证明其自我成理。以此理法,防止不合时宜与不确切用语。又如“他者真实之缺乏”等,于外界经验者中亦言不成立。何故?因无法度量而无见证。即使至迦毗罗卫王之时亦无现前现证。
Yaṃ pana ‘‘atthi padhānaṃ bhedānaṃ anvayadassanato sakalakalāpamattaṃ viyā’’ti te anumānaṃ vadanti. Iminā hi bhedānaṃ satvādīnaṃ vijjamānapadhānatā paṭiññātā. Ettha ca vuccate – sakalādīnaṃ padhānaṃ tabbibhāgehi kiṃ aññattaṃ, udāhu anaññanti, kiñcettha yadi aññattaṃ, sabbo loko padhānamayoti samayavirodho siyā, saṇṭhānabhedena aññattha paṭijānanato na dosoti ce? Taṃ na, valayakaṭakādisaṇṭhānabhedepi kanakābhedadassanato. Na hi saṇṭhānaṃ vatthubhedanimittaṃ tassa anupādānattā. Yaṃ yassa bhedanimittaṃ, na taṃ tassa anupādānaṃ yathā suvaṇṇamattikādighaṭādīnaṃ suvaṇṇaghaṭo mattikāghaṭo koseyyapaṭo kappāsapaṭoti ca sādhetabbadhammarahitañca udāharaṇaṃ. Na hi padhānekakāraṇapubbakattaṃ sakalādīnaṃ pakativādino siddhaṃ, nāpi kāpilānaṃ kathañci aññattānujānanato. Anaññatte pana udāharaṇābhāvo. Na hi tadeva sādhetabbaṃ tadeva ca udāharaṇaṃ yuttaṃ, anvayadassanampi asiddhaṃ. Na hi tadeva tena anvitaṃ yujjati. Padhānena anvayadassanampi asiddhaṃ paravādinoti guṇassa padhānassa ananujānanato. Atha yaṃ kiñci kāraṇaṃ padhānaṃ ‘‘padhīyati ettha phala’’nti, evampi asiddhameva kāraṇe phalassa atthibhāvānanujānanato, hetuno ca asiddhanissayatāparābhimatabhedānanujānanato. Atha visesena kāraṇāyattavuttitā phalassa sādhīyati, na kiñci viruddhaṃ dhammānaṃ yathāsakaṃ paccayena paṭiccasamuppattiyā icchitattāti.
对“存在主要差异以说明一切交错论述”之见解,谓之差异即事物差别所表明的显现。此中说法是:一切差异在细分之处有何不同呢?例如无二谓无,若存在无则世界皆以差异涵盖,矛盾于整体否定也。即使成环形、块状等分辨,见黄金与陶瓷罐均成分差异,非分裂之缘。区分差异即为无依附。若为差异原因,则无依附,如黄金陶瓷罐细分。论敌主张整体不能成理,因为缺少区别,迦毗罗卫等亦不承认任何差异。因无差异例证,不应证成,亦无合理示现。用差异说明整体并不成立。亦不存在因差异而说明性质优劣。若有因缘说明结果,则如同果果成就,非相违法则应生因果链理。
Apica pakativādino ‘‘satvarajatamasaṅkhātānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ guṇānaṃ samabhāvo pakati, sā ca niccā satvādivisamasabhāvato aniccato mahatādivikārato anaññā’’ti paṭijānanti. Sā tesaṃ vuttappakārā pakati na sijjhati tato viruddhasabhāvato vikārato anaññattā. Na hi assassa visāṇaṃ dīghaṃ, tañca rassato govisāṇato anaññanti vuccamānaṃ sijjhati. Kiñca bhiyyo? Tiṇṇaṃ ekabhāvābhāvato. Satvādiguṇattayato hi pakatiyā anaññattaṃ icchantānaṃ tesaṃ satvādīnampi pakatiyā anaññattaṃ āpajjati, na ca yuttaṃ tiṇṇaṃ ekabhāvoti. Evampi pakati na sijjhati. Kathaṃ? Anekadosāpattito. Yadi hi byattasabhāvato vikārato abyattasabhāvā pakati anaññā, evaṃ sante hetumantatā aniccatā abyāpitā sakiriyatā anekatā nissitatā liṅgatā sāvayavatā paratantratāti evamādayo aneke dosā pakatiyā āpajjanti, na jātivikārato anaññā paṭijānitabbā. Tathā ca sati samayavirodhoti kappanāmattaṃ pakatīti asiddhā sāti niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṃ.
且复论及对三种性质同等生成快速灭尽者的反论者,他们辩说:『三者性质平等之中,谓其俱相应,且因常恒不易、七种如初不平等、无常及大变化之异,未能相互同等。』此是他们所作之反论,终不得立。其由相违逆性及变化性而无同一性。譬如牛鞭非长鱼刺,且谓鞭因韧软而灭,实不可成。复何况三者因有或无其一不一致,欲求众生品质所同之同一性,自然在众生间亦非同一,于是三者无合一性。故此反论无法成立。何以故?种种过失颠倒成由。若异性及变化非异性无变化中同一,则无由异性、无常、因果、依赖、差别、累积等多重过失生起于反论之中,亦不应承因本性变化无同一之说。且所谓记忆时点相违乃推测未证,故非真确,无需随其流转消极跟随。
Pakatiyā ca asiddhāya taṃnimittakabhāvena vuccamānā mahatādayopi asiddhā eva. Yathā ca pakati mahatādayo ca, evaṃ issarapajāpatipurisakālasabhāvaniyatiyadicchādayopi. Etesu hi issaro tāva na sijjhati upakārassa adassanato. Sattānañhi jātiyaṃ mātāpitūnaṃ bījakhettabhāvena kammassa hīnatādivibhāgakaraṇena, tato parañca utuāhārānaṃ brūhanupatthambhanena, indriyānaṃ dassanādikiccasādhanena upakāro dissati, na, evamissarassa. Hīnatādivibhāgakaraṇamissarassāti ce? Taṃ na, asiddhattā. Yathāvutto upakāraviseso issaranimmito, na kammunāti sādhanīyametaṃ. Itaratrāpi samānametanti ce? Na, kammato phalaniyamasiddhattā . Sati hi katūpacite kammasmiṃ tattha yaṃ akusalaṃ, tato hīnatā, yaṃ kusalaṃ, tato paṇītatāti siddhametaṃ. Issaravādināpi hi na sakkā kammaṃ paṭikkhipituṃ.
对反论之不可成立,此即以缘起之理说明,又称大变化等亦不可成立。如大变化诸事,关涉主从时节及人畜状态之恒常不变,彼时有变化而无变化平衡不出现。众生之生由父母如耕种田地,因业劣异而形态不同,继以季节食物滋养,感官之视听等发用,而见其不同,这皆非由主导之绝对变化发生。若谓由于感官不同即产生区别,则无成立;缘於业果报关系不变。记忆时点与恶业净业成就之理相符,可证此理。反论者亦不能否定业力。
Apicetassa lokavicittassa issaranimmānabhāve bahū dosā sambhavanti. Kathaṃ? Yadi sabbamidaṃ lokavicittaṃ issaranimmitaṃ, saheva vacanena pavattitabbaṃ, na kamena. Na hi sannihitakāraṇānaṃ phalānaṃ kamena uppatti yuttā, kāraṇantarāpekkhāya issarassa sāmatthiyahāni. Cakkhādīnaṃ cakkhuviññāṇādīsu kāraṇabhāvo na yutto. Karotīti hi kāraṇanti. Issaro eva ca kārakoti sabbakāraṇānaṃ kāraṇabhāvahāni. Yehi puthuvisesehi issaro pasīdeyya, tesañca sayaṃkāratā āpajjati, tathā sabbesaṃ hetukānaṃ kāraṇabhāvo. Yañjetaṃ nimmānaṃ, tañcassa attadatthaṃ vā siyā, paratthaṃ vā siyā. Attadatthatāyaṃ attano issarabhāvahāni akatakiccatāya isitāvasitābhāvato. Tena vā nimmitena yaṃ attano kātabbaṃ, taṃ kasmā sayameva na karoti. Paratthatāyaṃ pana paro nāmettha loko evāti kimatthiyaṃ tassa nirayādirogādivisādinimmānaṃ. Yā cassa issaratā, sā sayaṃkatā vā siyā paraṃkatā vā ahetukā vā. Tattha sayaṃkatā ce, tato pubbe anissarabhāvāpatti. Paraṃkatā ce, pacchāpi anissarabhāvāpatti sauttaratā ca siyā. Ahetukā ce, na kassaci anissaratāti evamissarassapi asiddhi veditabbā.
且此世间大众对主导(主宰)之存在生起诸多过失错误,如若众生一切皆由主导所制,则此说必须循规蹈矩,悉随语言而出,而非因业所致。诸条件因缘联合,并非由主导所能强制。眼等识受,非主导所生,若谓主导为一切因,则此世所有皆是其造作,其造作必自利益或他利。若造作自我利益,则主导在所作行为上虚废未动;若为他利,则他不于此世。此主导或为自利、或他利、或无因者,亦无法证实其存在。
Yathā ca issaro, evaṃ pajāpati puriso ca. Nāmamattameva hettha viseso. Tehi vādīhi pakappitaṃ yadidaṃ ‘‘pajāpati puriso’’ti. Taṃnimittakaṃ pana lokappavattiṃ icchantānaṃ pajāpativāde purisavāde ca issaravāde viya dosā asiddhi ca vidhātabbā. Yathā cete issarādayo, evaṃ kālopi asiddho lakkhaṇābhāvato. Paramatthato hi vijjamānānaṃ dhammānaṃ sabhāvasaṅkhātaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ upalabbhati. Yathā pathaviyā kathinatā, na evaṃ kālassa, tasmā natthi paramatthato kāloti. Kālavādī panāha ‘‘vattanālakkhaṇo kālo’’ti. So vattabbo ‘‘kā panāyaṃ vattanā’’ti. So āha ‘‘samayamuhuttādīnaṃ pavattī’’ti. Tampi na, rūpādīhi atthantarabhāvena aniddhāritattā. Paramatthato hi aniddhāritasabhāvassa vattanālakkhaṇatāyaṃ sasavisāṇādīnampi taṃlakkhaṇatā āpajjeyya.
如同主导之说,亦有婆罗门或人为之。皆成名称上不同,此即婆罗门男人之所谓。彼等论者之反论即为人说,对婆罗门男及主导说皆有弊端且不可证真。此等论说,随时间而变,然就究竟真理,万法有自性及特征。譬如大地之坚固,非时时不同,故真实时间无常。时间论者称「流转特征即时间」,反问时间为何物?答曰乃诸事之流转,此流转非由色等外在实在所决定。究竟实为流转,无可得执,以致诸相现前。
Yaṃ pana vadanti kāṇādā ‘‘aparasmiṃ aparaṃ yugapadi ciraṃ khippamiti kālaliṅgānīti liṅgasabbhāvato atthi kālo’’ti, taṃ ayuttaṃ liṅgino anupalabbhamānattā. Siddhasambandhesu hi liṅgesu liṅgamattaggahaṇena liṅgini avabodho bhaveyya. Na ca kenaci aviparītacetasā tena liṅgena saha kadāci kālasaṅkhāto liṅgī gahitapubboti. Ato na yuttaṃ ‘‘liṅgasabbhāvato atthi kālo’’ti. ‘‘Aparasmiṃ apara’’ntiādikassa visesassa nimittabhāvato yuttanti ce? Na, paṭhamajātatādinimittakattā tassa. Na ca paṭhamajātatādi nāma koci dhammo atthi aññatra samaññāmattatoti nattheva paramatthato kālo. Kiñca bhiyyo, bahūnaṃ ekabhāvāpattito. Atītādivibhāgena hi lokasamaññāvasena bahū kālabhedā. Tvañcetaṃ ekaṃ vadasīti bahūnaṃ ekabhāvābhāvato nattheva paramatthato kālo. Tathā ekassa anekabhāvāpattito. Yo hi ayaṃ ajja vattamānakālo, so hiyyo anāgato ahosi, sve atīto bhavissati. Hiyyo ca vattamāno ajja atīto ahosi, tathā sve vattamānopi aparajja. Na cekasabhāvassa anekasabhāvatā yuttāti asiddho paramatthato kālo. Dhammappavattiṃ pana upādāya kappanāmattasiddhāya lokasamaññāya atītādivibhāgato voharīyatīti vohāramattakoti daṭṭhabbo.
又如有人论时间,谓「同时两异相,或久或速,时间乃由此相而显」,此乃不恰当之见。时间于所依诸相无法被分别执取。既已分别执取,则时间之说无立足者。若谓「同时两相」是由「先生」等因缘所起,则缘起之观非以时间为因。且时间无别于一般差别。故一者不可谓多,一者不可称多。今日之现在时间,尚且昔日未至,明日未有。昨日为现时之前,今为如今之后。非一实有,故非绝对时间。时间无一不可数性,非实有。以真谛之观,时间须以诸法相续为据,不能以时间绝对分割。以俗谛观,时间应随过去分别而立。
Sabhāvaniyatiyadicchādayopi asiddhā. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Lakkhaṇābhāvā. Na hi sabhāvato niyatiyadicchā sambhavati. Aññathā evaṃvidho koci bhāvo atthi ce, tesaṃ sabhāvasaṅkhātena lakkhaṇena bhavitabbaṃ, patiṭṭhāpakahetunā ca na catthi. Kevalaṃ panete vādā vimaddiyamānā ahetuvāde eva tiṭṭhanti, na cāhetukaṃ lokavicittaṃ visesābhāvappasaṅgato. Ahetukabhāve hi pavattiyā yvāyaṃ narasuranirayatiracchānādīsu indriyādīnaṃ viseso, tassa abhāvo āpajjati, na cāyaṃ paṇḍitehi icchito. Kiñca? Diṭṭhabhāvato. Diṭṭhā hi cakkhādito cakkhuviññāṇādīnaṃ bījādito aṅkurādīnaṃ pavatti, tasmāpi hetutovāyaṃ pavatti. Tathā pure pacchā ca abhāvato. Yato yato hi paccayasāmaggito yaṃ yaṃ phalaṃ nibbattati, tato pubbe pacchā ca na tassa nibbatti sambhavati, kiñca bahunā. Yadi ahetuto pavatti siyā, ahetukā pavattīti imāpi vācā yathāsakapaccayasamavāyato pure pacchā ca bhaveyyuṃ, na ca bhavanti aladdhappaccayattā, majjhe eva ca bhavanti laddhappaccayattā. Evaṃ sabbepi saṅkhatā dhammāti na sijjhati ahetuvādo. Tasmiñca asiddhe pavattiyā ahetubhāvo viya ahetupariyāyavisesabhūtā sabhāvaniyatiyadicchādayopi asiddhā eva hontīti veditabbā.
有关恒常因果及次第之说,亦属不可证。何因?缺少真实特征。恒常因果若具有本性及次第,则必有特定标志,无此标志,则恒常无因果终无次第。某些辩论者胡乱推出因无因立场,不过是无因状态之诡辩。因无因状态,必致特例风险,如感官等生起,实因已有条件,非凭空发生。所见诸识由种子促发,故有因果。前后相续相依,不可断裂。若无因而起,则属彻底无因,诸言不合因果序列法则。故此乃属聚合法领域之相续状态,无法以无因立场解释因明次第,恒常因果及次第之不可证性为可知矣。
Yaṃ pana kāṇādā ‘‘paramāṇavo niccā, tehi dviaṇukādiphalaṃ nibbattati, tañca aniccaṃ , tassa vasenetaṃ lokavicitta’’nti vadanti, tampi micchāparikappamattaṃ. Na hi paramāṇavo nāma santi aññatra bhūtasaṅghātā. So pana aniccova, na ca niccato aniccassa nibbatti yuttā tassa kāraṇabhāvānupapattito tathā adassanato ca. Yadi ca so kassaci kāraṇabhāvaṃ gaccheyya, anicco eva siyā vikārāpattito. Na cāyaṃ sambhavo atthi, yaṃ vikāraṃ anāpajjantameva kāraṇaṃ phalaṃ nibbatteyyāti. Vikārañce āpajjati, kutassa niccatāvakāso, tasmā vuttappakārā paramāṇavo sattā aniccā, aññepi niccādibhāvena bāhirakehi parikappitā asiddhā evāti veditabbaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘dhammappabhedato pana aññassa saccikaṭṭhassa asiddhattā’’ti.
有人以为,微小原子是恒常的,由它们产生二元质子等,因而它们自身也是恒常的,世人由此见解。然而这种见法是错误而无分辨力的。微小原子绝不是独立存在,只有众多物质结合而成。微小原子确实是无常的,但不会由恒常的本质产生,它是因缘而生且无常的变化体。若微小原子获得某种因缘,便是无常的且起变化。也不存在某种变化未发生而因其变化生成果实。变化本身发生,何来恒常的可能?故此称微小原子为存在,实为断见错误;有人还以恒常等外在性质为依据而构思,亦属无根据,应知如此。故说“因法差别,别入他人真实立场无真实性”。
Etthāha ‘‘yadi paramatthato puggalo na upalabbhati, evaṃ pana puggale anupalabbhamāne atha kasmā bhagavā ‘atthi puggalo attahitāya paṭipanno’ti (a. ni. 4.95; kathā. 22), ‘cattārome, bhikkhave, puggalā santo saṃvijjamānā lokasmi’nti (a. ni. 4.95; kathā. 22) ca tattha tattha puggalassa atthibhāvaṃ pavedesī’’ti. Vineyyajjhāsayavasena. Tathā tathā vinetabbānañhi puggalānaṃ ajjhāsayavasena vineyyadamanakusalo satthā dhammaṃ desento lokasamaññānurūpaṃ tattha tattha puggalaggahaṇaṃ karoti, na paramatthato puggalassa atthibhāvato.
这里说,若究竟真理上不存在“人”,但在世人无法觉知“人”时,佛世尊仍称“有为利于人”的修行,称四众弟子为“众人”,以示此处具体人的利益存在。对此有执着见的人应当舍弃。由此可知,佛陀作为教主,为利益具体众生,顺应世俗众生的见解和执着,分别宣说“人”的不同涵义,但从究竟法无我真理层面,并没有真实体的人存在。
Apica aṭṭhahi kāraṇehi bhagavā puggalakathaṃ katheti hirottappadīpanatthaṃ, kammassakatādīpanatthaṃ, paccattapurisakāradīpanatthaṃ, ānantariyadīpanatthaṃ, brahmavihāradīpanatthaṃ, pubbenivāsadīpanatthaṃ, dakkhiṇāvisuddhidīpanatthaṃ, lokasammutiyā appahānatthañcāti. ‘‘Khandhā dhātū āyatanāni hirīyanti ottappantī’’ti hi vutte mahājano na jānāti, sammohaṃ āpajjati, paṭisattu vā hoti ‘‘kimidaṃ khandhā dhātū āyatanāni hirīyanti ottappanti nāmā’’ti. ‘‘Itthī hirīyati ottappati, puriso, khattiyo, brāhmaṇo’’ti pana vutte jānāti, na sammohaṃ āpajjati, na paṭisattu hoti, tasmā bhagavā hirottappadīpanatthaṃ puggalakathaṃ katheti. ‘‘Khandhā kammassakā, dhātuyo āyatanānī’’ti vuttepi eseva nayo. Tasmā kammassakatādīpanatthampi puggalakathaṃ katheti. ‘‘Veḷuvanādayo mahāvihārā khandhehi kārāpitā, dhātūhi, āyatanehī’’ti vuttepi eseva nayo. Tathā ‘‘khandhā mātaraṃ jīvitā voropenti, pitaraṃ, arahantaṃ, ruhiruppādakammaṃ, saṅghabhedakammaṃ karonti, dhātuyo, āyatanānī’’ti vuttepi, ‘‘khandhā mettāyanti , dhātuyo, āyatanānī’’ti vuttepi, ‘‘khandhā pubbenivāsaṃ anussaranti, dhātuyo, āyatanānī’’ti vuttepi eseva nayo. Tasmā bhagavā paccattapurisakāradīpanatthaṃ ānantariyadīpanatthaṃ brahmavihāradīpanatthaṃ pubbenivāsadīpanatthañca puggalakathaṃ katheti. ‘‘Khandhā dānaṃ paṭiggaṇhanti, dhātuyo, āyatanānī’’ti vuttepi mahājano na jānāti, sammohaṃ āpajjati, paṭisattu vā hoti ‘‘kimidaṃ khandhā dhātū āyatanāni paṭiggaṇhanti nāmā’’ti. ‘‘Puggalo paṭiggaṇhātī’’ti pana vutte jānāti, na sammohaṃ āpajjati, na paṭisattu hoti, tasmā bhagavā dakkhiṇāvisuddhidīpanatthaṃ puggalakathaṃ katheti. Lokasammutiñca buddhā bhagavanto nappajahanti lokasamaññāya lokābhilāpe ṭhitāyeva dhammaṃ desenti, tasmā bhagavā lokasammutiyā appahānatthampi puggalakathaṃ kathetīti imehi aṭṭhahi kāraṇehi bhagavā puggalakathaṃ katheti, na paramatthato puggalassa atthibhāvatoti veditabbaṃ.
世尊述说“人”时,以八种因缘启发吝怯心、业因、自己能力、内在反省、梵行、宿世因缘、净施、世俗观念的断除等缘故。关于“五蕴、六界、十八界”,世人不知道其含义而产生迷惑和质疑“为何称之为羞耻忏悔?”等。若指出“女性羞耻忏悔,男子、贵族、婆罗门亦复如是”,他们则明白不生迷惑,为此佛说启发羞惭忏悔心。称“五蕴为业体、六界为缘所依”,因而说与业因相关。称“在维卢婆大寺以诸蕴为住处”,称“众蕴断生生命、死者、阿拉汉、恶业、破僧业,六界为缘”,称“众蕴具慈心、六界为依”,称“众蕴忆宿世”,由此分别说明诸因缘。称“众蕴接受布施,六界为依”,世人不解而迷惑质疑,称“人接受布施”,则明白无迷惑。因世俗观念未被舍弃,佛及佛弟子仍顺应世俗过俗语而说“人”,由此说此“人”言者为反世俗观念启发之法,不是究竟真理之“人”。故须知佛分别说“人”时,非究竟人之真义。
Dhammappabhedākārenevāti yathāvuttarūpādidhammappabhedato aññassa saccikaṭṭhassa asiddhattā rūpādidhammappabhedākāreneva puggalassa upaladdhiyā bhavitabbanti attho. Tena ‘‘kiṃ tava puggalo upalabbhamāno ruppanākārena upalabbhati, udāhu anubhavanasañjānanābhisaṅkharaṇavijānanesu aññatarākārenā’’ti dasseti tabbinimuttassa sabhāvadhammassa loke abhāvato. Avisesavisesehi puggalūpalabbhassa paṭiññāpaṭikkhepapakkhā anujānanāvajānanapakkhā. Yadipime dvepi pakkhā anulomapaṭilomanayesu labbhanti, ādito pana paṭhamaṃ ṭhapetvā pavatto paṭhamanayo, itaro dutiyanti imaṃ nesaṃ visesaṃ dassento ‘‘anujānanā…pe… veditabbo’’ti āha. Yathādhikatāya laddhiyā anulomanato cettha paṭhamo nayo anulomapakkho, tabbilomanato itaro paṭilomapakkhoti vuttoti veditabbanti.
所谓“法之分别之理”,是指法中形态差别,即表示他人真实立场不具真实性。依此可知,人的分别出现以形态差别为由。如示“为何人于外形中分别知觉”,说的是由对感官经历建立认知心理状态。而本质真理中,此等分别现象皆无真实实质。因对具体人的分别认知有接受与拒绝两面,若这两面分别接受与否顺序不同,则其前后关系定其正逆方向。一旦确立了第一面方向,则依其关系看,相反方向即为反方向。
Tena vata reti ettha tenāti kāraṇavacanaṃ. Yena puggalūpalabbho patiṭṭhapīyati, tena hetunā. Svāyaṃ hetu sāsanikassa bāhirakassa ca vasena heṭṭhā dassito eva. Hetupatirūpake cāyaṃ hetusamaññā paramatthassa adhippetattā. Heṭṭhā ‘‘ājānāhi niggaha’’nti niggahassa saññāpanamattaṃ kataṃ, taṃ idāni ‘‘yaṃ tattha vadesī’’tiādinā nigamanarūpena micchābhāvadassanena ca vibhāviyamānaṃ pākaṭabhāvakaraṇato āropitaṃ patiṭṭhāpitaṃ hotīti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘āropitattā’’ti vuttaṃ.
此处云“因是如彼”,谓作为因之说。所谓人的分别觉受建立在此因上。自身因缘和外缘等各自显现为因。此因同于“因之相似”,为究竟真义之主宰。下说“成就依凭”,是说依依止之称。此因现前时,则以“据此而言”结论作为收束,若结论错误呈现,则属他造虚假参与强加建立之物,此因果关系乃注释中所谓“被加之故”。
Ettha ca ‘‘puggalo upalabbhatī’’ti paṭiññāvayavo sarūpeneva dassito. ‘‘Tenā’’ti iminā sāmaññato hetāvayavo dassito. Yvāyaṃ yasmā paṭiññādhammo hutvā sadisapakkhe vijjamāno, visadisapakkhe avijjamānoyeva hetu lakkhaṇūpapanno nāma hoti, na itaro, tasmā yattha so vijjati na vijjati ca, so sadisāsadisabhāvabhinno duvidho diṭṭhantāvayavo. Yathā rūpādi upalabbhati, tathā puggalo. Yathā ca sasavisāṇaṃ na upalabbhati, na tathā puggaloti upanayo. Svāyaṃ ‘‘vattabbe kho puggalo upalabbhati saccikaṭṭhaparamatthenā’’ti imāya pāḷiyā dīpito, yo aṭṭhakathāyaṃ saddhiṃ hetudāharaṇehi ‘‘pāpanā’’ti vutto. Nigamanaṃ pāḷiyaṃ sarūpeneva āgataṃ, yā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘ropanā’’ti vuttāti. Evaṃ porāṇena ñāyakkamena sādhanāvayavā niddhāretvā yojetabbā.
此处“人有所觉”显示为认可因缘因素。由“因而”表示其为通常之因缘因素。因为此缘起事理法,当其存在时为明知一侧,不存在时为不明知一侧,故为一对对立现象。就像形色等觉知对应存在。若无痛苦则无人生。此理称为对立两例。正如“人应被视为有分别觉”的巴利语引申,解释为“恶劣”的因示。结论中巴利文“种子”以原形显示,即与释义对应。依古老诸释论学者,当此种因种属于修道资粮应辨别结合利用。
Idāni vattanena parapakkhupalakkhite hetudāharaṇe anvayabyatirekadassanavasena niddhāretvā sādhanapayogo yojetabbo. Kāraṇaṃ vattabbanti kimettha vattabbaṃ. Hetudāharaṇehiyeva hi saparapakkhānaṃ sādhanaṃ dūsanaṃ vā, na paṭiññāya, tassā sādhetabbādibhāvato. Taṃ pana dvayaṃ ‘‘tena vata re’’tiādipāḷiyā vibhāvitaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pāpanāropanāsīsena dassitaṃ. Paṭiññāṭhapanā pana tesaṃ visayadassanaṃ kathāyaṃ taṃmūlatāyāti veditabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘yaṃ pana vakkhatī’’tiādi. Teneva ca aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘idaṃ anuloma…pe… ekaṃ catukkaṃ veditabba’’nti vakkhati. Tathā cāha ‘‘yathā pana tatthā’’tiādi. Niggahova visuṃ vutto, na paṭikammanti adhippāyo. Visuṃ vuttoti ca pāpanāropanāhi asammissaṃ katvā visuṃ aṅgabhāvena vutto, na tadaññataro viya tadantogadhabhāvena vutto, nāpi ṭhapanā viya agaṇanupagabhāvenāti attho. Ye panāti padakāre sandhāyāha. Dutiye…pe… āpajjati tattha niggahassa ayathābhūtattā paṭikammassa ca yathābhūtabhāvatoti adhippāyo.
现在,应以对立面相互对照的因缘例证为依据,通过连贯与相反两种观察,确立修习方法加以运用。为何要这么做?这是因缘例证本身对各种对立面的修习,既能成就亦能败坏,因其不乏妨碍之因,故须以修习为基础加以实现。这里所述的二法,用 ‘‘tena vata re’’ 等古巴利语表达,佛经注疏中亦有以善恶加罪称述,须知其根本在于宣说证义。因而记载 ‘‘yaṃ pana vakkhatī’’ 等语,其实正是注疏中所言 ‘‘此乃顺理...其可见者四种之一’’。又言 ‘‘yathā pana tatthā’’ 等语。所谓‘指涉’乃明示意念,非谓否定之意;“指涉”意涵在于排除误解,非谓完全反对,亦非仅以他断言代替,需知言语所指事物乃具体相状。诸语句逐字解释即是。而 ‘‘dutiye... āpajjati’’ 所指次第出现,实为指言语结论不当论断及事实真相存在之上,乃言论纠纷之升降因果。
§2
2. Paramatthato puggalaṃ nānujānāti, vohārato pana anujānātīti sakavādimataṃ jānantenapi paravādinā chalavasena vibhāgaṃ akatvā ‘‘puggalo nupalabbhati saccikaṭṭhaparamatthenā’’ti pucchāya katāya sakavādī tattha ayaṃ puggalavādī, imassa laddhi paṭikkhipitabbāti paramatthasaccaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘āmantā’’ti. ‘‘Na upalabbhatī’’ti hi vuttaṃ hoti. Puna itaro sammutisaccaṃ sandhāya ‘‘yo saccikaṭṭho’’tiādimāha. Tassattho – yo lokavohārasiddho saccikaṭṭho, tato eva kenaci apaṭikkhipitabbato paramatthato tato so puggalo nupalabbhatīti. Puna sakavādī pubbe paramatthasaccavasena puggale paṭikkhitte idāni sammutisaccavasenāyaṃ pucchāti mantvā taṃ appaṭikkhipanto ‘‘na hevaṃ vattabbe’’ti āha. Tenāha ‘‘attanā adhippetaṃ saccikaṭṭhamevāti sammutisaccaṃ sandhāyāti adhippāyo’’ti . Evamavaṭṭhite ‘‘yadi paravādinā…pe… nārabhitabbā’’ti idaṃ na vattabbaṃ paṭhamapucchāya paramatthasaccassa saccikaṭṭhoti adhippetattā. ‘‘Atha sakavādinā…pe… āpajjatī’’ti idampi na vattabbaṃ dutiyapucchāya sammutisaccassa saccikaṭṭhoti adhippetattā.
第2条,从究竟实相而言,不识个人,唯凭语言方识,故虽知一方称谓,异方却不同意,这是辩论者学说。论辩者不分对立,问曰:若无此终极真理,如何获得个人?对此,辩论者以真理难获为据,谓“人无法依究竟真理所获个人”。对这一点,另说赞同之语称“真理确实存在”。因真理乃世俗言说所证,故世俗言说未必全然否定究竟真理之存,故可认为个人未能以究竟真理被识别。又前者辩论未承认个人,但现在承认世俗真理,问及此点,辩论者回答“不可如此言”。于是说:“真理自现世存在,故言语之真理是共识”,便是对于世俗真理的体现。于是由此推出论法,谓若他方起争议,不能恶意反对,不可反悔,故此处应承认“究竟实相不识个人”的论点。
Yadi ubhayaṃ adhippetanti idaṃ yadi paṭhamapucchaṃ sandhāya, tadayuttaṃ tassā paramatthasaccasseva vasena pavattattā. Atha dutiyapucchaṃ sandhāya, tassā sammutisaccavasena paṭhamatthaṃ vatvā puna missakavasena vattuṃ ‘‘sammutisaccaparamatthasaccāni vā ekato katvāpi evamāhā’’ti vuttattā tampi na vattabbameva. Dvepi saccānīti sammutiparamatthasaccāni. Tesu paramatthasaccasseva nippariyāyena saccikaṭṭhaparamatthabhāvo, itarassa upacārena. Tathā ca vuttaṃ ‘‘māyā marīci…pe… uttamaṭṭho’’ti. Tasmā sammutisaccavasena upaladdhiṃ icchantenapi paramatthasaccavasena anicchanato ‘‘puggalo upalabbhati saccikaṭṭhaparamatthenā’’tiādinā anuyogo yutto. ‘‘Padhānappadhānesu padhāne kiccasiddhī’’ti eteneva ‘‘na ca saccikaṭṭhekadesena anuyogo’’tiādi nivattitañca hoti saccikaṭṭhekadesabhāvasseva asiddhattā. Nāssa paramatthasaccatā anuyuñjitabbāti assa saccikaṭṭhassa paramatthasaccatā paravādinā na anuyuñjitabbā ‘‘puggalo nupalabbhati saccikaṭṭhaparamatthenā’’ti sakavādinopi saccikaṭṭhaparamatthato tassa icchitabbattāti adhippāyo. Voharitasaccikaṭṭhassa attanā adhippetasaccikaṭṭhatāpi yuttā tassa tena adhippetattā. Svāyamattho heṭṭhā dassitoyeva. Vuttanayova dosoti ‘‘dvepi saccānī’’tiādinā anantarameva vuttaṃ sandhāyāha. Tassa pana adosabhāvo dassitoyeva. Atha na iti atha na bhūtasabhāvatthena upalabbheyyāti yojanā. Vattabboti yadettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ ‘‘yo lokavohārasiddho’’tiādinā vuttameva, tasmā ettha ‘‘paramatthato puggalaṃ nānujānātī’’tiādinā adhippāyamagganaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
若两者都承认,则针对前题,则该真理为究竟真理之只是一种存在。若问第二题,则依世俗真理解释第一题,再以他方论证说“即便同时论及世俗与究竟之真亦不可行”,依此说两种真理。究竟真理内涵乃由真理之终极演绎而来,有别于世俗真理。又如经说“幻影、光影......最高一境”是明喻。故即使欲以世俗真理获得,却由于执著究竟真理而难以成就“人因究竟真理为可识别者”之思想,二说俱存。亦说“主要与主导分别之作用”,以此反对“仅凭真理一致思维”之说。无须以究竟真理配合世俗真理,因为世俗真理为主导,且对世俗真理之认可亦是以自身论据取信。言语本身含义明现其过失。言说“有两种真理”之语,即刻指出这一点。再者,非断言与非存在之观念,不应分别认知。论法指出“何谓应当所论”,即为“既为世俗所认可之真理”,故此处论及“究竟实相中无识个人”事实,应当如是观。
Anuññeyyametaṃ siyāti etaṃ anupalabbhanaṃ paṭhamapucchāyaṃ viya dutiyapucchāyampi anujānitabbaṃ siyā. Na vā kiñci vattabbanti atha vā kiñci na vattabbaṃ ṭhapanīyattā pañhassa. Tathā hissa ṭhapanīyākāraṃ dassento ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādimāha. Ettha ca kāmaṃ saccadvayākārena puggalo nupalabbhati, sammutiyākārena pana nupalabbhatīti upalabbhanabhāvassa vasena paṭikkhepo katoti ayamettha adhippāyo daṭṭhabbo. Anuññātaṃ paṭikkhittañcāti paṭhamapucchāyaṃ anuññātaṃ, dutiyapucchāyaṃ paṭikkhittaṃ. Etaṃ chalavādaṃ nissāyāti etaṃ ekaṃyeva vatthuṃ uddissa anujānanapaṭikkhipanākāraṃ chalavacanaṃ nissāya. Tvaṃ niggahetabboti yojanā. Sambhavantassa sāmaññenāti niggahaṭṭhānabhāvena sambhavantassa anulomanayena anujānanapaṭikkhepassa samānabhāvena. Asambhavantassa kappananti paccanīkanayena tassa niggahaṭṭhānabhāvena asambhavantassa tathā kappanaṃ saṃvidhānaṃ chalavādo bhavituṃ arahati. ‘‘Atthavikappupapattiyā vacanavighāto chala’’nti vuttovāyamattho. Tenāti yathāvuttakappanaṃ chalavādoti vuttattā. Vacanasāmaññamattaṃ kappitaṃ chalaṃ vadati etenāti chalavādo. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘chalavādassa kāraṇattā chalavādo’’ti. Vacanasāmaññamattaṃ atthabhūtaṃ tadatthaṃ chalavādaṃ nissāya. ‘‘Vicāretabba’’nti vuttaṃ, kimettha vicāretabbaṃ. Yadipi pakkhassa ṭhapanāmūlakaṃ anujānanāvajānanānaṃ micchābhāvadassanaṃ tabbisayattā, pāpanāropanāhi eva pana so vibhāvīyati, na ṭhapanāyāti pākaṭoyamattho.
此即不可认识,是指未曾获得之亏缺;初问与复问皆应予以承认。无论何言不可说,或不应说,无须为该问题设定固定答案。如以“如此如斯”为例,将欲望二真理之关系论述个人不可认识,以世俗意义难以认识,因而否定之。此即为断言之否定。所谓“不可认识并否定”,乃为有一种否定依赖他方论说之辩论术语,用以驳斥某一论点。应以此为论据,若有人要求类证驳倒,则所依据即是此。由此“缘起发明造语为断言之破坏,谓之‘辩误’”。乃告知“如上所述,以造语为断论”,言语仅为断言所运用的工具,并由此说明“辩误只是言语之常见表现”。故言论“辩错即辩误”,因此辩论知见本质即在言论之间。故言“辩误即辩论错误行为”,语句如是。乃依此而论:“辩误之因即由辩论故”。而判断“何须思考”,以及“若推论假设一个方向不实,则起断言就会误入”,皆出于此义。因即使对于以立断论反驳之语,亦应认知其矛盾以求真理,其含义乃在排除无理加罪而非仅凭言语决断。
§4-5
4-5.Tenāti sakavādinā. Tena niyāmenāti yena niyāmena sakavādinā catūhi pāpanāropanāhissa niggaho kato, tena niyāmena nayena. So niggaho dukkaṭo aniggahoyevāti dassento āha ‘‘aniggahabhāvassa vā upagamitattā’’ti, pāpitattāti attho. Evamevāti yathā ‘‘tayā mama kato niggaho’’tiādinā aniggahabhāvūpanayo vutto, evameva. Etassāti ‘‘tena hī’’tiādinā imāya pāḷiyā vuttassa.
第4至5条,所言乃辩论者之见。所谓“以此规则”,即指辩论者通过四种不当加罪建立对立论据。采用此规则与法则,称为修正之说。论述谓“虽为规章,而非规章等于无规章”,意为不正当规章亦为罪过。正如经中说“那是我所施加的罪过”等语,说明规则未必绝对。此语出自古巴利文本“tena hī”等表达,所指即为此处论述内容。
Anulomapaccanīkavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 随顺与相违之解释已毕。
2. Paccanīkānulomavaṇṇanā二、相违与随顺之解释
§7-10
7-10.Aññenāti sammutisaccabhūtena. Parassāti sakavādino. So hi paravādinā paro nāma hoti. Paṭiññāpaṭikkhepānaṃ bhinnavisayattā ‘‘avirodhitattā’’ti vuttaṃ. Abhinnādhikaraṇaṃ viya hi abhinnavisayameva viruddhaṃ nāma siyā, na itaranti adhippāyo. Tamevatthaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘na hi…pe… āpajjatī’’ti āha. Yadi evaṃ kathamidaṃ niggahaṭṭhānaṃ jātanti āha ‘‘attanopanā’’tiādi. Tena paṭiññāntaraṃ nāma aññamevetaṃ niggahaṭṭhānanti dasseti.
第7至10条,所述乃世俗真理者。所谓“谁为对方”,辩论者称“对方即是他人”。因不持相违而共存谓“无冲突”,并非指事理不一,亦非他人论客观不同,实属论法推理结果。以此论述乃分明“无冲突即相依”,故曰“若如此,如何对立场产生”,遂言“自执后立”,即某一立场独占而非共存。由此而出“他立判异”,即非真不同,而指在持立之后之表现。说法指向“互对立而言,原理即是由之而生”,是以“不执他立即无对立”,体证此意。
Paccanīkānulomavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 相违与随顺之解释已毕。
Suddhasaccikaṭṭhavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 纯粹真实义之解释已毕。
2. Okāsasaccikaṭṭho二、处所真实义
1. Anulomapaccanīkavaṇṇanā1. 随顺与违逆之解释
§11
11. Sāmaññena vuttaṃ visesaniviṭṭhaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘sabbatthāti sabbasmiṃ sarīreti ayamattho’’ti. Sāmaññajotanā hi visese avatiṭṭhatīti visesatthinā viseso anupayujjitabboti. Etenāti desavasena sabbattha paṭikkhepavacanena.
第十一条。「依一般说法谓之特别已废止者」,言曰:「处处即处处身,是此义也。」解释表明,一般界说之光明确实不超越特定之别。故特指者不应随意应用。由此知以地方性质者,则处处以否定言辞递加。
3. Kālasaccikaṭṭho3. 时间真实义
1. Anulomapaccanīkavaṇṇanā1. 随顺与违逆之解释
§12
12.Majjhimajātikāleti paccuppannattabhāvakāle. Attabhāvo hi idha ‘‘jātī’’ti adhippeto. Tato atīto purimajātikālo, anāgato pacchimajātikālo. Imesu tīsūti sabbattha, sabbadā, sabbesūti imesu tīsu nayesu. Pāṭhassa saṃkhittatā suviññeyyāti taṃ ṭhapetvā atthassa sadisataṃ vibhāvento ‘‘idhāpi hi…pe… yojetabba’’nti āha. Etthāpi ‘‘na kenaci sabhāvena puggalo upalabbhatī’’ti ayamattho vutto hoti. Na hi kenaci sabhāvena upalabbhamānassa sakalekadesavinimutto pavattikālo nāma atthīti.
第十二条。「所谓中间出生者」,指现生阶段。名「自性」,此处「生」为主宰称谓。由此分为已过去之前身时代、未来未至之后世时代。此三者均称「处处、恒常、全体于此三种中」。为便于诵读简略,将主旨解析,宣说「如这里所说……应当配合」等。此处亦云「无一人由此众会得现身」,意指无论何人现身皆非为从会中得一体不可。因「同时在会中得现身」非真义也。
4. Avayavasaccikaṭṭho4. 部分真实义
1. Anulomapaccanīkavaṇṇanā1. 随顺与违逆之解释
§13
13. Tatiyanaye na sabbekadhammavinimuttaṃ pavattiṭṭhānaṃ nāma atthīti yojetabbaṃ.
第十三条。第三论旨谓非一切法皆解脱为修证之境。此义为应当采纳之义。
Okāsādisaccikaṭṭho处所等真实义
2. Paccanīkānulomavaṇṇanā2. 违逆与随顺之解释
§14
14.Anulomapañcakassātiādimhi aṭṭhakathāvacane. Puna tatthāti yathāvutte aṭṭhakathāvacane, tesu vā anulomapañcakapaccanīkesu. Sabbattha puggalo nupalabbhatītiādikassa pāṭhappadesassa attho ‘‘sarīraṃ sandhāyā’’tiādinā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttanayena veditabbo attho. Paṭikammādipāḷinti paṭikammaniggahaupanayananigamanapāḷiṃ. Tīsu mukhesūti ‘‘sabbatthā’’tiādinā vuttesu tīsu vādamukhesu. Paccanīkassa pāḷi vuttāti sambandho. Tanti pāḷiṃ. Saṅkhipitvā āgatattā sarūpena avutte. Suddhika…pe… vuttaṃ hoti tattha ‘‘sabbatthā’’tiādinā sarīrādino parāmasanaṃ natthi, idha atthīti ayameva viseso, aññaṃ samānanti.
第十四条。「顺行五处」等语谓之注疏词篇。复由此处谓注疏语,或称「顺行五处」论释。于全部均谓「人无现身」等初文义,应凭「依身聚」释解即可知。关于回向等,乃是回归、连接、归纳三义。三处门,通称「处处」等语用表。此处谓两种学论之编缩及多样阐明。纯洁部分中述「处处」等谓身及诸部分无他过失,谓今义特指,非他义相似。
Saccikaṭṭhavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 真实义之解释已毕。
5. Suddhikasaṃsandanavaṇṇanā5. 纯粹连结之解释
§17-27
17-27. Saccikaṭṭhassa, saccikaṭṭhe vā saṃsandanaṃ saccikaṭṭhasaṃsandananti samāsadvayaṃ bhavatīti dassento ‘‘saccikaṭṭhassā’’tiādimāha. Tattha saccikaṭṭhassa puggalassāti saccikaṭṭhasabhāvassa paramatthato vijjamānasabhāvassa puggalassa. Rūpādīhi saddhiṃ saṃsandananti saccikaṭṭhatāsāmaññena rūpādīhi samīkaraṇaṃ. Saccikaṭṭheti saccikaṭṭhahetu, tattha vā taṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ katvā. ‘‘Tulyayoge samuccayo’’ti samuccayatthattā eva ca-kārassa saccikaṭṭhena upaladdhisāmaññena idha rūpamāhaṭanti tassa udāhaṭabhāvo yuttoti ‘‘yathārūpa’’nti nidassanavasena attho vutto, aññathā idha rūpassa āharaṇameva kimatthiyaṃ. Evaṃ sesadhammesupi. Yā panettha aññattapucchā, sāpi nidassanatthaṃ upabrūheti aññattanibandhanattā tassa. Opammasaṃsandane pana nidassanattho gāhīyatīti imasmiṃ suddhikasaṃsandane kevalaṃ samuccayavaseneva atthadassanaṃ yuttanti adhippāyo. Rūpādīni upādāpaññattimattattā puggalassa so tehi añño, anañño cāti na vattabboti ayaṃ sāsanakkamoti āha ‘‘rūpādīhi…pe… samayo’’ti. Anuññāyamāneti tasmiṃ samaye sutte ca appaṭikkhipiyamāne. Ayañca attho sāsanikassa paravādino vasena vuttoti veditabbaṃ.
十七至二十七条。关于颜色界(saccikaṭṭha),或称于界间接连称谓颜色界间之连接,意为整体二合。宣说曰「颜色界之……」等。其意指颜色界者,即颜色界之体相及实质,属整体色界人身。与色等共计连结,即颜色界之总括。颜色界称颜色界之因,或言其于此已决心也。「集合因缘相加」称总和之实质,总和性质即颜色界所具。此意举比如说,谓「如其形状」之说明,说理合乎义理。否则对色身而言,仅物件摄取何用?如此明了其他原理。若有不同疑问,亦以此显现以解答。类似相似对接处,即以示例说理。若只是比拟相接,则解释更清楚。此处纯净对接处意指仅总和之义显现,属主要说理。形色等因缘对应意指与人身相关,非相互不同,故不成立分异,此为此教义名称「色等和合时」之意。未曾相让意谓,仍为此时本经所示之真义,不得违背。且此义乃教诫者、犯异者尚且应知之义。
‘‘Ājānāhiniggaha’’nti pāṭho diṭṭho bhavissati, aññathā ‘‘paṭilomapañcakāni dassitāni, paṭikammacatukkādīni saṃkhittānī’’ti na sakkā vattunti adhippāyo. Codanāya vinā paravādino paṭijānāpanaṃ natthīti vuttaṃ ‘‘paṭijānāpanatthanti…pe… codanattha’’nti. Codanāpubbakañhi tassa paṭijānāpanaṃ. Tena phalavohārena kāraṇaṃ vuttanti dasseti. Abyākatattāti abyākaraṇīyattā, bhagavatā vā na byākatattā. Yadi ṭhapanīyattā paṭikkhipitabbanti imasmiṃ paccanīkanaye ṭhapanīyattā pañhassa sakavādinā paṭikkhipitabbaṃ. Parenapīti paravādināpi ṭhapanīyattā laddhimeva nissāya anulomanaye paṭikkhepo katoti ayamettha suddhikasaṃsandanāya adhippāyo yutto anulomepi rūpādīhi aññattacodanāyameva paravādinā paṭikkhepassa katattāti adhippāyo.
「无知取持」语句被视为校勘文本,可见其具体表达。否则「逆行五处示现」等及「回向四门等简略法」不可成立之说法。意旨为「无启发则无承认」等句义也。对启发前有一定承认之说,故指出原因。无宣示之义,意即世尊未宣示之义。若止于断定则应否定。本文谓新论者亦应否定问答问题。检校对比他论者亦须恰如其分,顺通此理。就此清净对接,提出观点。亦即逆行亦即色等不同指摘,仅因他论指摘而生对接否定,有此新论观点。
Suddhikasaṃsandanavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 纯粹连结之解释已毕。
6. Opammasaṃsandanavaṇṇanā6. 譬喻连结之解释
§28-36
28-36.Upaladdhisāmaññena aññattapucchā cāti iminā dvayampi uddharati upaladdhisāmaññena aññattapucchā, upaladdhisāmaññena pucchā cāti. Tattha pacchimaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘dvinnaṃ samānatā’’tiādi. Tassattho – dvinnaṃ rūpavedanānaṃ viya rūpapuggalānaṃ saccikaṭṭhena samānatā tesaṃ aññattassa kāraṇaṃ yuttaṃ na hoti. Atha kho…pe… upalabbhanīyatāti idañca saṃsandanaṃ vicāretabbaṃ. Ayaṃ hettha adhippāyo – yadi saccikaṭṭhasāmaññena rūpapuggalānaṃ upaladdhisāmaññaṃ icchitaṃ, teneva nesaṃ aññattampi icchitabbaṃ. Atha paramatthavohārabhedato tesaṃ aññattaṃ na icchitaṃ, tato eva upaladdhisāmaññampi na icchitabbanti.
28-36.『以认识差别为通常问法』,此处提出了两项内容:即以认识差别为通常之询问,并以认识差别为询问。对此,后文援引“二者均等”等语加以说明。其意为:两种色受之个体如实性平等,后者的差别缘由不当成立。进一步说……忆及“能够被认识”的含义,即此乃合点之处。此处有一因:若基于实性平等而期望色之个体的认识差别,则同样应期望其他差别。然而,依据究竟义理角度,此等差别不被期望,故亦不可期望有认识差别。
§37-45
37-45.Upaladdhīti puggalassa upaladdhi vijjamānatā. ‘‘Paṭikammapañcaka’’nti viññāyatīti yojanā.
37-45.『认识』是指个体的认识现起。所谓“行为五法”是用以理解的连接。
Opammasaṃsandanavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 譬喻连结之解释已毕。
7. Catukkanayasaṃsandanavaṇṇanā七、四种方法对照会通的解释
§46-52
46-52.Ekadhammatopīti sattapaññāsāya saccikaṭṭhesu ekadhammatopi. Etena tato sabbatopi puggalassa aññattānanujānanaṃ dasseti. Tenāha aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘sakalaṃ paramatthasaccaṃ sandhāyā’’ti. Rūpādiekekadhammavasena nānuyuñjitabbo avayavabyatirekena samudāyassa abhāvato. Yasmā pana samudāyāvayavā bhinnasabhāvā, tasmā ‘‘samudāyato…pe… niggahāraho siyā’’ti paravādino āsaṅkamāha. Etaṃ vacanokāsanti yadipi sattapaññāsadhammasamudāyato puggalassa aññattaṃ na icchati tabbinimuttassa saccikaṭṭhassa abhāvato, tadekadesato panassa anaññattampi na icchateva. Na hi samudāyo avayavo hotīti. Tasmā ‘‘taṃ paṭikkhipato kiṃ niggahaṭṭhānanti vattuṃ mā labbhethā’’ti dassetuṃ ‘‘ayañcā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Rūpādidhammappabhedavibhāgamukheneva anavasesato puggaloti gahaṇākāradassanavasena pavatto paṭhamavikappo, dutiyo pana avibhāgato paramatthasaccabhāvasāmaññenāti ayaṃ imesaṃ dvinnaṃ vikappānaṃ viseso. Itīti vuttappakāraparāmasananti āha ‘‘eva’’nti.
46-52.『单一法属性』者,指七十五种实性中的某一单一事实。此示众生一切差别允许的涵义。故此论中言『因缘究竟法皆在此』。色等各法不应混合运用,因其分别为组成要素,不同性质必然形成分离。因此对“由缘起者……难镇之”等语,对方者持纲领予以推测。此语意在表明,若七十五法起自缘起,即究竟法中无差别,亦不存单一差别。由于缘起非部件,因此对“除去彼者,何以为依?”等语予以阐明。如同色等法由不同成分分化而成,众生不随顺混几十法,故形成两种分别观点,即此处两种观点之差异。此即前述论述批判所及,故称“如此”。
Sabhāvavinibbhogatoti sabhāvena vinibbhujjitabbato. Sabhāvabhinno hi dhammo tadaññadhammato vinibbhogaṃ labhati. Tenāha ‘‘rūpato aññasabhāgattā’’ti. Rūpavajjeti rūpadhammavajje . Tīsupīti ‘‘rūpasmiṃ puggalo, aññatra rūpā, puggalasmiṃ rūpa’’nti imesu evaṃ pavattesu tīsupi anuyogesu. Sāsaniko evāyaṃ puggalavādīti katvā āha ‘‘na hi so sakkāyadiṭṭhiṃ icchatī’’ti. ‘‘Rūpavā’’ti iminā rūpena sakiñcanatāva ñāpīyati, na rūpāyattavuttitāti āha ‘‘aññatra rūpāti ettha ca rūpavā puggaloti ayamattho saṅgahito’’ti.
『依本性出离』者,谓应凭本性加以依止。由于法相分别,则必依非本性法得解脱。故有「因色异本性」之说。色受者,谓色法所成之受。‘三法’者,在此三类相续中,色法指‘色中之个体、除色之外之色、个体中的色’,此三相续中。本为教法论述中此种众生说,故言“不能生我见”。以‘有色者’之意,显示与色之关系,并非指色所有,云“除色者,此处所说有色者乃包含之意”。
Catukkanayasaṃsandanavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 四种方法对照会通的解释完毕。
Niṭṭhitā ca saṃsandanakathāvaṇṇanā. · 会通论的解释也完毕。
8. Lakkhaṇayuttivaṇṇanā八、特相合理性的解释
§54
54. Lakkhaṇayuttikathāyaṃ ‘‘chalavasena pana vattabbaṃ ājānāhi niggaha’’nti pāṭho gahetabbo.
54.关于特征相合之释,谓“六十有四应依特征”,此文可取为经文。
Lakkhaṇayuttivaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 特相合理性的解释完毕。
9. Vacanasodhanavaṇṇanā九、语句审定的解释
§55-59
55-59.Padadvayassa atthato ekatteti padadvayassa ekattatthe satīti attho. Parikappavacanañhetaṃ dosadassanatthaṃ ‘‘evaṃ sante ayaṃ doso’’ti. Tayidaṃ ekattaṃ upalabbhati evāti pacchimapadāvadhāraṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Kehici puggalo kehici na puggalo’’ti byabhicāradassanato parena na sampaṭicchitanti katvā tameva asampaṭicchitattaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘puggalassa hī’’tiādimāha. Tattha avibhajitabbatanti ‘‘upalabbhati cā’’ti evaṃ avibhajitabbataṃ. Vibhajitabbatanti ‘‘puggalo ca tadaññañca upalabbhatī’’ti evaṃ vibhajitabbataṃ. Etena ‘‘puggalo upalabbhati evā’’ti pacchimapadāvadhāraṇaṃ veditabbaṃ, na ‘‘puggalo eva upalabbhatī’’ti imamatthaṃ dasseti. Taṃ vibhāganti yathāvuttaṃ vibhajitabbāvibhajitabbaṃ vibhāgaṃ vadato sakavādino, aññassa vā kassaci. Etassāti paravādino . Yathāvuttavibhāganti ‘‘puggalo upalabbhati…pe… kehici na puggalo’’ti evaṃ pāḷiyaṃ vuttappakāraṃ vibhāgaṃ. Yathāāpāditenāti ‘‘puggalo upalabbhatīti padadvayassa atthato ekatte’’tiādinā āpāditappakārena. Na bhavitabbanti yadipi tena puggalo upalabbhati eva vuccati, upalabbhatīti pana puggalo eva na vuccati, atha kho aññopi, tasmā yathāvuttena pasaṅgena na bhavitabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘maggitabbo ettha adhippāyo’’ti.
55-59.两字连用,意为合一;“两字合一”意即该意。为指责而设之例,言“如此有失”的意。此合一语建立是可见的,故应注意后字含义。由“某些为人,某些非人”之混乱表达,显现他意并非恰当,故分明阐述“此为人群的不足”之说。此处不可不分断,谓“可见故宜分断”。而分断者,谓“人及其识别部分均被认识”,此为分断。故“人被认识起”是应注意后字含义而非“仅人被认识”。这亦是论师按合理分断对辩者或他人所述,分断与不分断之皈依。所谓所谓解释分断,与否分断均称分断,依此说法。故“人被认识是应注意后字含义”,并非“人唯一被认识”为义。此为分断者依合理分断乃合理分断之讨论。非谓该“人被认识”即生起,若单称被认识,则人不被称,而有他者。故依此应注意联系,不可生此误解。故言“这里宜停顿”以示此理。
§60
60.Atthato puggalo natthīti vuttaṃ hoti attasuññatādassanena anattalakkhaṇassa vihitattā.
第六十条。言谓此时没有实存之人,乃由无我性所显的无我特性所立。
Vacanasodhanavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 词净论释已毕。
10. Paññattānuyogavaṇṇanā十、施设随问论释
§61-66
61-66.Rūpakāyāvirahaṃsandhāya āha, na rūpataṇhāsabbhāvaṃ. Tathā sati anekantikattā paṭikkhipitabbameva siyā, na anujānitabbanti. ‘‘Atthitāyā’’ti āhāti sambandho. Kāmībhāvassa anekantikattā kassaci kāmadhātūpapannassa kāmadhātuyā āyattattābhāvato ca kadāci bhāvassevāti yojanā.
第六十一至六十六条。就离欲身之门说曰:非由对色欲渴之生理本性应断除。且依正念之多面性,应当断除,不可忽略。所谓『缘』者,谓关系也。欲界众生因正念多面性、缘起于某欲根而生,或由于无加持而终止生存,时有分别彼时状态者,谓之缘也。
§67
67.Kāyānupassanāyāti kāyānupassanādesanāya. Sā hi kāyakāyānupassīnaṃ vibhāgaggahaṇassa kāraṇabhūtā, kāyānupassanā eva vā. Evaṃladdhikattāti añño kāyo añño puggaloti evaṃladdhikattā. Āhacca bhāsitanti ṭhānakaraṇāni āhantvā kathitaṃ, bhagavatā sāmaṃ desitanti attho.
第六十七条。所谓身念观者,即身念观之说法。身念观乃身于身上的分别取舍之助因,或者说仅仅是身念观。所谓互不相成,即一身与另一人彼此对立。由此起意而讲话,语义含藏着施行场所的描述,世尊所共说者即此义。
Paññattānuyogavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 施设随问论释已毕。
11. Gatianuyogavaṇṇanā十一、趣随问论释
§69-72
69-72. Yānissa suttāni nissāya laddhi uppannā, tesaṃ dassanato parato ‘‘tena hi puggalo sandhāvatī’’tiādinā pāḷi āgatā, purato pana ‘‘na vattabbaṃ puggalo sandhāvatī’’tiādinā, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘dassento…pe… bhavitabba’’nti. Dassetvāti vā vattabbanti ‘‘yānissa…pe… tāni dassetvā ‘tena hi puggalo sandhāvatī’tiādimāhā’’ti vattabbanti attho. Dassentoti vā idaṃ dassanakiriyāya na vattamānatāmattavacanaṃ, atha kho tassā lakkhaṇatthavacanaṃ, hetubhāvavacanaṃ vāti na koci doso.
第六十九至七十二条。依凭车辆经迹而生者,彼等之观照过后有‘该人乃有业随’等巴利文句,然前文却有“不可言该人为有业随”之说,故有云“观照中…应…成”之断。观照或言“应谓车辆等若有所见,以彼车辆等转述‘该人为有业随’之名”,此为义。所谓“须观照”非仅限于示现言语,而为该词意旨及其因缘状态,无可非难。
§91
91.So vattabboti so jīvasarīrānaṃ anaññatāpajjanākāro vattabbo, natthīti adhippāyo. ‘‘Rūpī attā’’ti imissā laddhiyā vasena ‘‘yena rūpasaṅkhātena attano sabhāvabhūtena sarīrena saddhiṃ gacchatī’’ti evaṃ pana atthe sati so ākāro vutto eva hoti, tathā ca sati ‘‘rūpaṃ puggaloti ananuññātattā’’ti evampi vattuṃ na sakkā. Yasmā pana ‘‘idha sarīranikkhepā’’ti anantaraṃ vakkhati, tasmā ‘‘so vattabbo’’ti vuttaṃ. Nirayūpagassa puggalassa antarābhavaṃ na icchatīti idaṃ purātanānaṃ antarābhavavādīnaṃ vasena vuttaṃ. Adhunātanā pana ‘‘uddhaṃpādo tu nārako’’ti vadantā tassapi antarābhavaṃ icchanteva, keci pana asaññūpagānaṃ. Arūpūpagānaṃ pana sabbepi na icchanti. Tattha ye ‘‘saññuppādā ca pana te devā tamhā kāyā cavantī’’ti suttassa atthaṃ micchā gahetvā cutūpapātakālesu asaññīnaṃ saññā atthīti antarābhavatova asaññūpapattiṃ icchanti, tadaññesaṃ vasena ‘‘savedano…pe… paṭikkhipatī’’ti dassento ‘‘ye panā’’tiādimāha. Ke panevaṃ icchanti? Sabbatthivādīsu ekacce.
第九十一条。谓应说者,即应说明生命之体无他现象造作之体,无实存之体,此乃确定之见。如“有色我”,以此所得而存,谓以色之属性与自性与身相应合于一体,故存此体;正念时此形体被称现象体,然因不可谓“色即是人”,且不可言“人即是色”,故不能如此说。既言“此处身舍”,故谓“应言之”。北狱有漏众生,因不愿中断其间,乃古者所言中断说。今世谓“上生之趣非狱”者,亦欲存此间断,然有不闻入狱者。对此色无漏众生,则绝不愿中断。彼处谓“识之起亦为此身而亡者”等,于末法时代,离识者谓识即为断等意,将此解为断生断灭之见,故谓其为离识生死说。谁欲此说?极少数众。
§92
92.Nevasaññānāsaññāyataneti nevasaññānāsaññāyatane bhave, acittuppāde vā saññā atthīti icchantīti na vattabbanti sambandho. Yato so saññābhavena asaṅgahito, bhavantarabhāvena ca saṅgahito.
第九十二条。所谓非识入灭识之处,谓非识入灭所处,非因心之生起而成识,故不谓欲生识境界。因此识之无,有情所分别,心行界乃所依存。
§93
93.Indhanupādāno aggi viya indhanena rūpādiupādāno puggalo rūpādinā vinā natthīti ettha ayamadhippāyavibhāvanā – yathā na vinā indhanena aggi paññāpīyati, na ca taṃ aññaṃ indhanato sakkā paṭijānituṃ, nāpi anaññaṃ. Yadi hi aññaṃ siyā, na uṇhaṃ indhanaṃ siyā, atha anaññaṃ, nidahitabbaṃyeva dāhakaṃ siyā, evaṃ na vinā rūpādīhi puggalo paññāpīyati, na ca tehi añño, nāpi anañño sassatucchedabhāvappasaṅgatoti paravādino adhippāyo. Tattha yadi aggindhanopamā lokavohārena vuttā, apaḷittaṃ kaṭṭhādiindhanaṃ nidahitabbañca, paḷittaṃ bhāsuruṇhaṃ aggidāhakañca, tañca ojaṭṭhamakarūpaṃ pabandhavasena pavattaṃ aniccaṃ saṅkhataṃ paṭiccasamuppannaṃ. Yadi evaṃ puggalo rūpādīhi añño anicco ca āpanno, atha paramatthato ca, tasmiṃyeva kaṭṭhādisaññite rūpasaṅkhātapaḷitte yaṃ usumaṃ so aggi taṃsahajātāni tīṇibhūtāni indhanaṃ. Evampi siddhaṃ lakkhaṇabhedato aggindhanānaṃ aññattanti aggi viya indhanato rūpādīhi añño puggalo anicco ca āpajjatīti.
第九十三节。以燃料之依附犹如火焰以燃料为依附,形色等诸法之依附于有情者,没有形色等则无有情。此处称为总摄断别,即世尊分别断灭之教义。如同没有燃料则火焰不生,且火焰不能由他燃料所生,亦不能生他燃料。若他燃料存在,则无热燃料,必为燃烧之火焰。同理,没有形色等则无有情,且他法不能由彼法生,亦无他法常断灭相应而生,此为异说者之断别。若以火燃料为譬喻,于世俗语境中,未净之木等为燃料,净热炽燃之火焰为燃烧物,且色相粗糙者如经络状带束,乃无常造作、缘起而生。若如是者则有情依形色诸法而异无常生起。究竟而言,于此处未净木等可称为色法构成之净热燃料,此燃料生三法性质同火焰。由此可知,燃料虽异,而断别存在,火焰亦依燃料而有不同,形色诸法依此而生异无常有情。故断别于火燃料与形色有情之间成立。
Gatianuyogavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 趣随问论释已毕。
12. Upādāpaññattānuyogavaṇṇanā十二、取施设随问论释
§97
97. Nīlaguṇayogato nīlo, nīlo eva nīlako, tassa, ayaṃ panassa nīlapaññatti nīlarūpupādānāti āha ‘‘nīlaṃ…pe… paññattī’’ti. Evaṃ pana pāṭhe ṭhite nīlaṃ upādāya nīloti kathamayaṃ paduddhāroti āha ‘‘nīlaṃ rūpaṃ…pe… ettha yo puṭṭho nīlaṃ upādāya nīlo’’ti. Etthāti etasmiṃ vacane. Tadādīsūti ‘‘pītaṃ rūpaṃ upādāyā’’tiādikaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ādi-saddena gahitameva tadatthadassanavasena gaṇhāti.
第九十七节。因蓝色之性相,应说此为蓝,蓝即为蓝色者。此乃蓝之名称,称为蓝色依于蓝色形色而得名。文中云“蓝……名称”等,即指此蓝色名称。于此句中,言“以蓝色为依附故称蓝”,此何谓翻译?即“蓝色及其名称”之释。其义为,上文“以黄色形色为依附”等类似说法,意在于通过名称显明其涵义,表达辞义所在。
§98
98.Vuttanti ‘‘maggakusalo’’tiādīsu chekaṭṭhaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Kusalapaññattiṃ kusalavohāraṃ.
第九十八节。谓“善行”及后续之词汇,皆根据数目已清晰论证发言。此“善行”之名称即为“善之称号”的展开说明。
§112
112.Pubbapakkhaṃ dassetvā uttaramāhāti paravādī pubbapakkhaṃ dassetvā sakavādissa uttaramāha.
第一百一十二节。先示前面论点,后者以此反驳,彼以先据见而终结之。
§115
115. ‘‘Rūpaṃ rūpavā’’tiādinayappavattaṃ paravādivādaṃ bhindituṃ ‘‘yathā na nigaḷo negaḷiko’’tiādinā sakavādivādo āraddhoti āha ‘‘yassa rūpaṃ so rūpavāti uttarapakkhe vuttaṃ vacanaṃ uddharitvā’’ti.
第一百一十五节。言“形即形者”等异端论调,欲破坏对方论断,复以“非吞者亦非被吞者”等语辩驳。谓“彼形即形”,反方提此言以响应,于后分说其语义与用意。
§118
118.Viññāṇanissayabhāvūpagamananti cakkhuviññāṇassa nissayabhāvūpagamanaṃ. Tayidaṃ visesanaṃ cakkhussāti imināva siddhanti na kataṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
第一百一十八节。所谓因识性本质缘起者,是指眼识依止而生。此定语修饰“于眼识中”,借此说明并非不可见之理。
Upādāpaññattānuyogavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 「执取施设随问解释」已完结。
13. Purisakārānuyogavaṇṇanā十三、人作随问解释
§123
123.Kammānanti kusalākusalakammānaṃ. Taggahaṇeneva hi taṃtaṃkiccakaraṇīye kiriyānampi saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Nipphādakappayojakabhāvenāti kārakakārāpakabhāvena.
业者者,谓善恶业。如此,应当了知,诸种应作之业,其业之聚集亦应观察。所谓发生与俱生,乃缘起者也,即因与所因的关系。
§125
125.Kammakārakassa puggalassa yo añño puggalo kārako. Tenapīti kārakakārakenapi. Tassāti kārakakārakassa. Aññanti aññaṃ kammaṃ. Evanti iminā vuttappakārena. Tehi tehi kārakehi puggalā viya aññāni kammāni karīyantīti dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘kammavaṭṭassa anupacchedaṃ vadantī’’ti. Evaṃ sante puggalassa kārako, kammassa kārakoti ayaṃ vibhāgo idha anāmaṭṭho hoti, tathā ca sati kārakaparamparāya vacanaṃ virujjheyyāti āha ‘‘puggalassa…pe… vicāretabbameta’’nti. Tassa kārakanti puggalassa kārakaṃ. Idañcāti na kevalaṃ puggalakārakassa kammakārakatāpattiyeva doso, atha kho idaṃ kammakārakatāya kārakaparamparāpajjanampi vicāretabbaṃ, na yujjatīti attho. Puggalānañhi paṭipāṭiyā kārakabhāvo kārakaparamparā.
业作者者谓某一人,别人即为所作之因。此中所谓因果,即作因者与所作之因。彼业者谓因果业。谓他人作他业,借此说明,诸多行为如不同作业人一般。故谓“业轮不致中断”。如是则作业者为人,业为作品,此区别在此不可混淆。又谓有因缘继续之说故,故有作业者之说。今此业者不仅仅是作业者本人对业作之过失,亦应考虑业之继缘损坏,非宜仅以作业而言。众人依习俗皆知因之所属与因之继缘。
§170
170.Eko antoti ‘‘gāho’’ti sassatagāhasaṅkhāto antoti attho.
一终乃所谓“界”;界谓恒常之界限也。
§176
176. Siyā añño, siyā anañño, siyā na vattabbo ‘‘aññoti vā anaññoti vā’’ti , evaṃ pavattanigaṇṭhavādasadisattā so eva eko neva so hoti, na aññoti laddhimattaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘idaṃ pana natthevā’’ti. Parassa icchāvasenevāti paravādino laddhivaseneva. Ekaṃ anicchantassāti ekaṃ ‘‘so karoti, so paṭisaṃvedetī’’ti gahaṇaṃ sassatadiṭṭhibhayena paṭikkhipantassa itaraṃ ucchedaggahaṇaṃ āpannaṃ. Tañca paṭikkhipantassa aññaṃ missakaṃ niccāniccaggahaṇaṃ, vikkhepaggahaṇañca āpannaṃ. Kārakavedakicchāya ṭhatvāti sveva kārako vedako cāti imasmiṃ ādāye ṭhatvā. Taṃtaṃanicchāyāti tassa tassa vādassa asampaṭicchanena. Āpannavasenapīti āpannagāhavasenapi ayaṃ anuyogo vuttoti yojanā. Sabbesaṃ āpannattāti heṭṭhā vuttanayena sabbesaṃ vikappānaṃ anukkamena āpannattā nāyamanuyogo katoti yojanā. Ekekassevāti tesu visuṃ visuṃ ekekasseva āpannattā. Tantivasena pana te vikappā ekajjhaṃ dassetvāti adhippāyo. Ekato yojetabbaṃ catunnampi pañhānaṃ ekato puṭṭhattā.
或为彼或不为;或不应言“或为或不为”。由流传争执之言形成,有时一者非真,既无他者,不能仅于他者成立。故曰“此无他”。揣度他人欲求犹如揣度怨对手。独一不欲者,谓一者它造作,一者感知,此因坚固恒常见怖故得否定,导致灭尽与坚固相互对应。对否认者有他误解,产生有无常等错观,及放逐观念相应。立业者即为作业者本人,此中表明立业者即是认识者。独一不欲者即为持己立场者。调和争执者谓此处采取。
Purisakārānuyogavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 「人作随问解释」已完结。
Kalyāṇavaggo niṭṭhito. · 「善品」已完结。
14. Abhiññānuyogavaṇṇanā十四、神通随问解释
§193
193.Vikubbatīti ettha iti-saddo ādiattho, pakārattho vā. Tena ‘‘dibbāya sotadhātuyā saddaṃ suṇātī’’tiādikaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Abhiññānuyogo daṭṭhabboti yojanā. Tadabhiññāvatoti āsavakkhayābhiññāvato. Arahato sādhananti arahato saccikaṭṭhaparamatthena puggalattābhāvasādhanaṃ. Tabbhāvassāti arahattassa. Arahattadhārānañhi khandhā nāma puggalattaṃ tassapi hotīti.
破坏者,谓此处“破坏”之言含义或开端或目的。故谓“由天耳根得闻声”等语,乃集合言也。自知悉联系则称为“连结”。称已了知者即断除烦恼已明者。谓阿拉汉成就者,以真理究竟之本性,实现无我之人。谓具足之境界者,谓阿拉汉获得者。阿拉汉之保持,五蕴亦成彼人之具足。
Abhiññānuyogavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 「神通随问解释」已完结。
15-18. Ñātakānuyogādivaṇṇanā15-18. 亲族随行等之解释
§209
209.Tatiyakoṭibhūtassāti tatiyakoṭisabhāvassa saṅkhatāsaṅkhatavinimuttasabhāvassa. Sabhāvassāti ca sabhāvadhammassa. Laddhiṃ nigūhitvāti puggalo neva saṅkhato, nāsaṅkhatoti laddhiṃ avibhāvetvā.
三界所成者,谓属于三界本性之所构成者,涵括有为与无为之集体及解脱集体。谓“本性”,即本性之法。谓了知而藏匿,谓人非为集体,非无集体,乃实质不分离也。
Ñātakānuyogādivaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 亲族随行等之解释已毕。
19. Paṭivedhānuyogādivaṇṇanā19. 通达随行等之解释
§218
218.Pajānanaṃ nāma na hoti nibbidādīnaṃ appaccayattā. Paricchedanasamatthatañca dassetīti sambandho.
知识的获得不是由对厌离等的缘起而产生的。这里所谓的联系,是指出其辨别的可能性。
§228
228.Saharūpabhāvo rūpena samaṅgitā, vinārūpabhāvo tato vinissaṭatāti tadubhayaṃ rūpassa abbhantaragamanaṃ bahinikkhamanañca hoti. Tasmā taṃ dvayaṃ saharūpabhāvavinārūpabhāvānaṃ lakkhaṇavacananti vuttaṃ.
同性相即以色相为同一所调合,非色相则自此而失,却因此,二者在色相中有内在的进入和外在的离散。由是,二者被称为具有同性相与非色相的特征。
§237
237.Oḷārikoti thūlo. Āhito ahaṃ māno etthāti attā, attabhāvo. So eva yathāsakaṃ kammunā paṭilabhitabbato paṭilābho. Padadvayenapi kāmāvacarattabhāvo kathito. Manomayo attapaṭilābho rūpāvacarattabhāvo. So hi jhānamanena nibbattattā manomayo. Arūpo attapaṭilābhoti arūpāvacarattabhāvo. So hi rūpena amissitattā arūpoti evamettha attho veditabbo. ‘‘Attā’’ti pana jīve lokavohāro niruḷho, asatipi jīve tathāniruḷhaṃ lokavohāraṃ gahetvā sammāsambuddhāpi voharantīti dassento ‘‘iti imā lokassa samaññā, yāhi tathāgato voharatī’’ti vatvā idāni yathā voharanti, taṃ pakāraṃ vibhāvento ‘‘aparāmasa’’ntiādimāha.
“大肿块”是指广大。所谓的“我”是自体,是自身的存在。这正是依照各自的业力所应得到的果报。用这一对词也说明了对欲乐的存在状态。由心所成的自我所得是以色相为依止的。因为禅那(入定)所生的,是依赖心法的存在状态。非色相的自我所得是以非色相为依止。由于失去了色相,故为非色相。此处“自体”的意思应理解为:众生界的生命活动是污染的,无常的,非真实的,因而即便是正觉者亦如实观察这种世界活动,如“如来以此世界的通俗认知行事”,于是说明了“如来依此法而行”的说法,称此为“不放逸”等。
Paccattasāmaññalakkhaṇavasenāti kakkhaḷaphusanādisalakkhaṇavasena aniccatādisāmaññalakkhaṇavasena ca. Imināti ‘‘paccattasāmaññalakkhaṇavasenā’’tiādinā vuttena paramatthato puggalābhāvavacanena . Ito purimāti tattha tattha sakavādipaṭikkhepādivibhāvanavasena pavattā ito atthasaṃvaṇṇanato purimā. Imināti vā ‘‘yathā rūpādayo dhammā’’tiādinā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttavacanena. Yathā cāti ettha ca-saddo samuccayattho. Tena samaññānatidhāvanaṃ sampiṇḍeti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā parāmāso ca na hoti janapadaniruttiyā abhinivisitabbato, yathā ca samaññātidhāvanaṃ na hoti, evaṃ ito purimā ca atthavaṇṇanā yojetabbā. Samaññātidhāvane hi sati sabbalokavohārūpacchedo siyāti.
所谓的“按各自普通特征”,是以坚硬、脆弱、磨损等为特征,亦是以无常等为普遍特征。此处的“按各自普通特征”等说,是从究竟意义上指个体存在的说法。往前说,为了驳斥异议等原因,以差别分析方式进行阐释;往后则说明意义。此处“按其如色等法”由此经典注释中所说,就是一言以蔽之的合成词。依此普通性的思维遍布一切,故称作合成。此说指:如同对方言乡称谓不应执著,如对普通性的思维不应定着,从而应当结合前后的意义说明。确有普通性思维时,则必然于一切世界活动有所断除。
Tasmā saccanti yasmā tattha paramatthākāraṃ anāropetvā samaññaṃ nātidhāvanto kevalaṃ lokasammutiyāva voharati, tasmā saccaṃ paresaṃ avisaṃvādanato. Tathakāraṇanti tatho avitatho dhammasabhāvo kāraṇaṃ pavattihetu etassāti tathakāraṇaṃ, paramatthavacanaṃ, aviparītadhammasabhāvavisayanti attho. Tenāha ‘‘dhammānaṃ tathatāya pavatta’’nti.
正由于此,真理是:那里没有强加的究竟实相、没有超过普通性的认知,只单单根据世俗的共识去行事,故真理是他方的无违逆而得以成立。故“如是因缘”是指正法的不变的法性、因缘缘起、理事相应的意义。由此故曰:“诸法理常发生。”
Paṭivedhānuyogādivaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 通达随行等之解释已毕。
Puggalakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 人论之解释已毕。
2. Parihānikathā2. 退失论
1. Vādayuttiparihānikathāvaṇṇanā一、论辩理路中退失论的注释
§239
239.Idaṃsuttanti idaṃ lakkhaṇamattaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Pañcime, bhikkhave, dhammā samayavimuttassa bhikkhuno parihānāya saṃvattantī’’ti (a. ni. 5.149-150) idampi hi suttaṃ anāgāmiādīnaṃyeva parihāninissayo, na arahato. Samayavimuttoti aṭṭhasamāpattilābhino sekkhassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Yathāha –
此经意谓应只见此特征而已。佛告比库:「有五法导致时间解脱者失去,(此为《增支部》5.149-150)此段经典事实上是说不还果等法失去的缘起,而非阿拉汉。所谓时间解脱是指学道人于八支成就时的解脱。例言 -
‘‘Katamo ca puggalo samayavimutto? Idhekacco puggalo kālena kālaṃ samayena samayaṃ aṭṭha vimokkhe kāyena phusitvā viharati, paññāya cassa disvā ekacce āsavā parikkhīṇā honti. Ayaṃ vuccati puggalo samayavimutto’’ti (pu. pa. 1).
何谓人于当时得解脱?此处有某人随顺时节,顺当时刻而得八解脱位,身体触合之时,常住其中,其以智慧了知,而有些染污已尽灭。此谓人于当时得解脱。
‘‘Parihānidhammo’’ti ca puthujjano ca ekacco ca sekkho adhippeto, na arahāti. Tasmāti yasmā yathādassitāni suttāni anāgāmiādīnaṃ parihāniladdhiyā nissayo, na arahato, tasmā. Taṃ nissāya taṃ apekkhitvā yasmā ‘‘arahatopī’’ti ettha arahatopi parihāni, ko pana vādo anāgāmiādīnanti ayamattho labbhati, tasmā pi-saddasampiṇḍitamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘arahatopi…pe… yojetabba’’nti āha. Yasmā vā kāmañcettha dutiyasuttaṃ sekkhavasena āgataṃ, paṭhamatatiyasuttāni pana asekkhavasenapi āgatānīti tesaṃ laddhi, tasmā ‘‘arahatopī’’ti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘idaṃ suttaṃ arahato’’tiādi.
又言“有破坏法”,指世人中有一人或数人是实修弟子、已得所依,尚非阿拉汉。因为诸经所示,如不可来果等,谓其破坏之法难获,故非阿拉汉。依此、依彼所希求者,若见言“即便是阿拉汉”,阿拉汉当亦有破坏。如此得义,故亦有说法道理,说“阿拉汉……应以此法结合”,因某等经继续为弟子等说,初中后经亦有非弟子依止故,故此注疏云“此经为阿拉汉说”等。
Tatiyasminti ‘‘sabbesaññeva arahantānaṃ parihānī’’ti etasmiṃ pañhe. So hi ‘‘sabbeva arahanto’’tiādinā āgatesu tatiyo pañho. Tesanti mudindriyānaṃ. Tatiyasmimpīti pi-saddo vuttatthasamuccayo. Tena paṭhamapañhaṃ samuccinoti ‘‘tatthapi tikkhindriyā adhippetā’’ti.
第三问云“唯有阿拉汉皆遭破坏”,此为正文疑问。所谓“唯有阿拉汉”是前文之第三问。三问之理义即三种根本感官。此第三问即言“甚意已”,是三问总摄。故首问集成曰“因动三感官为主”。
Soyeva na parihāyatīti sotāpannoyeva sotāpannabhāvato na parihāyatīti attho. Na cettha sakadāgāmibhāvāpattiyā sotāpannabhāvāpagamo parihāni hoti visesādhigamabhāvato. Pattavisesato hi parihānīti. Itareti sakadāgāmiādikā. Uparimaggatthāyāti uparimaggattayapaṭilābhatthāya ‘‘niyato’’ti vuttamatthaṃ aggahetvā.
若谓未遭破坏,是指初果斯陀含,因其身份称为斯陀含,故不谓未遭破坏。意不在此;非谓斯陀含果之得失即未遭破坏,此破坏特殊区别。再有者,指斯陀含及更上果得法,谓“固定者”。
Vādayuttiparihānikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 论辩理路中退失论的注释已结束。
2. Ariyapuggalasaṃsandanaparihānikathāvaṇṇanā二、以圣者相互比照说明退失论的注释
§241
241.Tatoti arahattato. Tatthāti dassanamaggaphale. Vāyāmenāti vipassanussāhanena. Tadanantaranti sotāpattiphalānantaraṃ. Paṭhamaṃ dassanamaggaphalānantaraṃ arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti, tato parihīno puna vāyamanto tadanantaraṃ na arahattaṃ pāpuṇātīti kā ettha yuttīti adhippāyo. Paravādī nāma yuttampi vadati ayuttampīti kiṃ tassa vāde yuttigavesanāyāti pana daṭṭhabbaṃ. Aparihānasabhāvo bhāvanāmaggo ariyamaggattā dassanādassanamaggo viya. Na cettha asiddhatāsaṅkā lokuttaramaggassa parassapi ariyamaggabhāvassa siddhattā, nāpi lokiyamaggena anekantikatā ariyasaddena visesitattā. Tathā na viruddhatā dutiyamaggādīnaṃ bhāvanāmaggabhāvassa oḷārikakilesappahānādīnañca parassapi āgamato siddhattā.
241、此云“是故,出自阿拉汉”。「是故」指觉察正道之成就。『努力』者,谓用内观禅定助缘。随后者,谓斯陀含所得果后继。先得觉察正道成就、得阿拉汉位,后虽努力欲修复,即不中得阿拉汉位,何故适合,此为主旨所在。论者名曰“适合论”,所谓不适合辩论,须细察。未遭破坏者之殊胜道,非凡间修习成就,亦非世俗道许多主张差异。故无冲突;他法修学始道成就后,虽习除烦恼但非正觉,不冲突。
Ariyapuggalasaṃsandanaparihānikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 以圣者相互比照说明退失论的注释已结束。
3. Suttasādhanaparihānikathāvaṇṇanā三、以经证成立退失论的注释
§265
265. Puggalapaññattiaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘patti, phusanā’’ti ca paccakkhato adhigamo adhippetoti vuttaṃ ‘‘pattabbaṃ vadatīti āha phusanāraha’’nti.
265、于“人之名称论疏”中谓“触合,及触获”等分别获得,称为当取,说明“当取说”,即谓“触合得法者”。
§267
267.Katasanniṭṭhānassāti imasmiṃ sattāhe māse utumhi antovasse vā aññaṃ ārādhessāmīti katanicchayassa.
267.何谓确定?即在此七年、月、雨季、旱季或其他期间内应当修习的决定。
Suttasādhanaparihānikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 以经证成立退失论的注释已结束。
Parihānikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 退失论释毕。
3. Brahmacariyakathā三、梵行论
1. Suddhabrahmacariyakathāvaṇṇanā一、纯净梵行论释
§269
269.Heṭṭhāpīti paranimmitavasavattidevehi heṭṭhāpi. Maggabhāvanampi na icchantīti viññāyati ‘‘idha brahmacariyavāso’’ti iminā ‘‘dvepi brahmacariyavāsā natthi devesūti upaladdhivasenā’’ti vuttattā.
269.所谓“在下”等,是相较于依止于他所持法而起的火焰天而言。关于修道的意愿亦无欲求,故说“这里有出家修行生活”,据说“在天界中无二种出家人”,此乃依照体验所说。
§270
270.Tassevāti paravādino eva. Puggalavasenāti ‘‘gihīnañceva ekaccānañca devāna’’nti evaṃ puggalavasena. Tassāti paravādino. Paṭikkhepo na yuttoti evaṃ puggalavasena atthayojanā na yuttāti adhippāyo. Puggalādhiṭṭhānena pana katāpi atthavaṇṇanā okāsavasena paricchijjatīti nāyaṃ doso. Tassāyaṃ adhippāyoti ayaṃ ‘‘gihīnañcevā’’tiādinā vutto tassa paravādino yadi adhippāyo, evaṃ saññāya paravādino sakavādinā samānādāyoti na niggahāraho siyā. Tenāha ‘‘saka…pe… tabbo’’ti. Paṭhamaṃ pana anujānitvā pacchā paṭikkhepeneva niggahetabbatā veditabbā. Keci ‘‘yattha natthi pabbajjā, natthi tattha brahmacariyavāsoti pucchāya ekaccānaṃ manussānaṃ maggappaṭivedhaṃ sandhāya paravādino paṭikkhepo. Yadipi so devānaṃ maggappaṭilābhaṃ na icchati, sambhavantaṃ pana sabbaṃ dassetuṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘gihīna’micceva avatvā ‘ekaccānañca devāna’nti vutta’’nti vadanti, taṃ na sundaraṃ ‘‘sandhāyā’’ti vuttattā, purimoyevattho yutto.
270.“则尔”等指的是异议者。依人而言,即谓‘有些居士与某些天人’——是依个人身份而言。‘则尔’即异议者。‘反驳不当’依此人的考量即为权谋手段。虽以个别见解作释义,言除贪染业障,然此并非过失。此权谋者言‘就如形容居士与某些天人之所在,缺乏出家人及修行之处而异议者反驳’。虽该者不欲获得天人修道效果,却全然展显,故经疏言‘居士与某些天人’兜售虚妄。此言非佳,称为指涉之异议,应依先前所述考虑。
Suddhabrahmacariyakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 纯净梵行论释毕。
2. Saṃsandanabrahmacariyakathāvaṇṇanā二、混杂梵行论释
§273
273.Rūpāvacaramaggenāti rūpāvacarajjhānena. Tañhi rūpabhavūpapattiyā upāyabhāvato maggoti vutto. Yathāha ‘‘rūpupapattiyā maggaṃ bhāvetī’’ti (dha. sa. 160). Idanti idaṃ rūpāvacarajjhānaṃ. ‘‘Idhavihāyaniṭṭhahetubhūto rūpāvacaramaggo’’tiādikaṃ dīpentaṃ vacanaṃ anāgāmimaggassa tabbhāvadīpakena ‘‘idha bhāvitamaggo’’tiādikena kathaṃ sametīti codetvā yathā sameti , taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘pubbe panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘pubbe’’ti iminā ‘‘idha bhāvitamaggo’’tiādikaṃ vadanti, idhāpi pana ‘‘rūpāvacaramaggenā’’tiādikaṃ. Tattha anāgāmī evāti anāgāmiphalaṭṭho eva. Jhānānāgāmīti asamucchinnajjhattasaṃyojanopi rūpabhave uppajjitvā anāvattidhammamaggaṃ bhāvetvā tattheva parinibbāyanato. Adhippāyoti yathāvutto dvinnaṃ aṭṭhakathāvacanānaṃ avirodhadīpako adhippāyo.
273.“色界道”即以修习色界禅定为道。此道由色界修禅而生起,乃生起色界之法之便。譬如‘以色界产生修行之道’(《大法集》160节)。意即此即为色界禅定。‘这是由住于此而成道者生起色界道’等文光明之语,指示未来果位之道,故云‘此处所修之道’。对此如何明了,应以先说‘先前’等为教证。先说‘先前’者指此‘此处所修之道’。此处亦称‘色界道’。其中‘未来果位’者即所证到的出离境界。禅定未断尽沁重烦恼而生起的色界所依调和法,以此道修习,最后达到涅槃。此权谋即是不抵触二者经典用语之调和理法。
Idhāti kāmaloke. Tatthāti brahmaloke. Ettha ca paravādī evaṃ pucchitabbo ‘‘tīhi, bhikkhave, ṭhānehī’’ti suttaṃ kiṃ yathārutavasena gahetabbatthaṃ, udāhu sandhāyabhāsitanti? Tattha jānamāno sandhāyabhāsitanti vadeyya. Aññathā ‘‘paranimmitavasavattideve upādāyā’’tiādi vattuṃ na sakkā ‘‘deve ca tāvatiṃse’’ti vuttattā. Yathā hi tassa ‘‘seyyathāpi devehi tāvatiṃsehi saddhiṃ mantetvā’’tiādīsu viya sakkaṃ devarājānaṃ upādāya kāmāvacaradevesu tāvatiṃsadevā pākaṭā paññātāti tesaṃ gahaṇaṃ, na teyeva adhippetāti suttapadassa sandhāyabhāsitatthaṃ sampaṭicchitabbaṃ, evaṃ ‘‘idha brahmacariyavāso’’ti etthāpi anavajjasukhaabyāsekasukhanekkhammasukhādisannissayabhāvena mahānisaṃsatāya sāsane pabbajjā ‘‘idha brahmacariyavāso’’ti imasmiṃ sutte adhippetā. Sā hi uttarakurukānaṃ devānañca anokāsabhāvato dukkarā dullabhā ca. Tattha sūriyaparivattādīhipi devesu maggapaṭilābhāya atthitā vibhāvetabbā, uttarakurukānaṃ pana visesānadhigamabhāvo ubhinnampi icchito evāti.
此谓欲界天。彼谓色界天。对该处异议者问曰:‘尊者们,当如何如所闻讲说把握“三处”经呢?’对此若明了,谓之把握。如未明,谓言‘依于依他所生火焰天’等说法不可持‘天有三十三’之语。譬如天帝萨咖与他天界天众共议,于欲界天众中有三十三天明显易知,故非为他加于天上;以经文语境处置此问,悉应默照而议,以经明“这里有行持出家生活”,依教法为出离及快乐之所依,以大聚会为基础成就的教法。此即北俱卢毗洲诸天及众多天人都极难遇得之境。又依日月周转等天法观照修道之果受,北俱卢毗洲诸天则殊胜为天法所依,故北俱卢毗洲天极有殊异之缘起,所有天人均希求之织。
Saṃsandanabrahmacariyakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 混杂梵行论释毕。
Brahmacariyakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 梵行论释毕。
3. Odhisokathāvaṇṇanā三、奥迪索论释
§274
274.Odhisoti bhāgaso, bhāgenāti attho. Bhāgo nāma yasmā ekadeso hoti, tasmā ‘‘ekadesena ekadesenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha yadi catunnaṃ maggānaṃ vasena samudayapakkhikassa kilesagaṇassa catubhāgehi pahānaṃ ‘‘odhiso pahāna’’nti adhippetaṃ, icchitamevetaṃ sakavādissa ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ parikkhayā diṭṭhigatānaṃ pahānāyā’’ti ca ādivacanato. Yasmā pana maggo catūsu saccesu nānābhisamayavasena kiccakaro, na ekābhisamayavasenāti paravādino laddhi, tasmā yathā ‘‘maggo kālena dukkhaṃ parijānāti, kālena samudayaṃ pajahatī’’tiādinā nānakkhaṇavasena saccesu pavattatīti icchito, evaṃ paccekampi nānakkhaṇavasena pavatteyya. Tathā sati dukkhādīnaṃ ekadesaekadesameva parijānāti pajahatīti dassetuṃ pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘sotāpatti…pe… ekadese pajahatī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sati hi nānābhisamaye paṭhamamaggādīhi pahātabbānaṃ saṃyojanattayādīnaṃ dukkhadassanādīhi ekadesaekadesappahānaṃ siyāti ekadesasotāpattimaggaṭṭhāditā, tato eva ekadesasotāpannāditā ca āpajjati anantaraphalattā lokuttarakusalānaṃ, na ca taṃ yuttaṃ. Na hi kālabhedena vinā so eva sotāpanno, asotāpanno cāti sakkā viññātuṃ. Tenāha ‘‘ekadesaṃ sotāpanno, ekadesaṃ na sotāpanno’’tiādi.
274.“阙舍”意为部分、方面。部分谓为独处一方,故说‘一方各自’。若以四道的缘起,指烦恼结的四部分分别断除,则名为‘部分断除’。异议者欲此为三结断除,故言‘三结已断’等起意。因道涉及四种真谛各有不同活动,非一时一法速成,故依言‘道缘时辨苦,时断集’等理即于各时分别修行,故异议者意谓应依多时多处而行。故依巴利语‘初果断除者分别断除’等经文释为:正念观察时分别断除诸结烦恼苦处仅一处,对初果成就者而言乃具实故。由此初果开始与达境便有所出离相继现起,是世出世间善人皆有之境,非依他法合适。因无时分断除即无成就,此诈言‘一时着’等不可据以断定。
Apicāyaṃ nānābhisamayavādī evaṃ pucchitabbo ‘‘maggañāṇaṃ saccāni paṭivijjhantaṃ kiṃ ārammaṇato paṭivijjhati, udāhu kiccato’’ti. Yadi ārammaṇatoti vadeyya, tassa vipassanāñāṇassa viya dukkhasamudayānaṃ accantaparicchedasamucchedā na yuttā tato anissaṭattā, tathā maggadassanaṃ. Na hi sayameva attānaṃ ārabbha pavattatīti yuttaṃ, maggantaraparikappanāyaṃ anavaṭṭhānaṃ āpajjatīti, tasmā tīṇi saccāni kiccato, nirodhaṃ kiccato ārammaṇato ca paṭivijjhatīti evamasammohato paṭivijjhantassa maggañāṇassa nattheva nānābhisamayo. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘yo, bhikkhave, dukkhaṃ passati, dukkhasamudayampi so passatī’’tiādi. Na cetaṃ kālantaradassanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. ‘‘Yo nu kho, āvuso, dukkhaṃ passati, dukkhasamudayampi so passati, dukkhanirodhampi…pe… dukkhanirodhagāminipaṭipadampi so passatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1100) ekasaccadassanasamaṅgino aññasaccadassanasamaṅgibhāvavicāraṇāyaṃ tadatthasādhanatthaṃ āyasmatā gavaṃpatittherena ābhatattā paccekañca saccattayadassanassa yojitattā. Aññathā purimadiṭṭhassa puna adassanato samudayādidassane dukkhādidassanamayojanīyaṃ siyā. Na hi lokuttaramaggo lokiyamaggo viya katakāribhāvena pavattati samucchedakattā. Tathā yojane ca sabbaṃ dassanaṃ dassanantaraparanti dassanānuparamo siyā. Evaṃ āgamato yuttito ca nānābhisamayassa asambhavato paccekaṃ maggānaṃ odhiso pahānaṃ natthīti niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṃ.
此外,应当向诸多各异分别之学者如此问答:『道的智慧在真谛中被证知时,究竟对何缘起了见解?譬如“因于业”的说法。』若言「缘起」者,即是指观智中对苦集的完全分别断灭,而此断灭若不稳固,则道的所见亦不正当。因为仅凭自己一念起始不应称为正当,而在道中未来之事的设观无由致果,故曰无法周全。由此三谛皆由「业」之缘起而被证悟,证得灭谛,也由缘起而见证。若无正断惑业,便无此道智中多种分别。经言:「比库们,见苦者,即见苦集。」非指后时见,且经文如是说:「朋友,若有人见苦,则亦见苦集,见苦灭,及见苦灭道。」(《增支部》5.1100)此乃一谛并行,无须反复思惟他义,是为长老牧牛示现,致使各别的谛相得以对治。反之,若不见苦集等多谛,则是早先观未显现苦集等苦之相,必与苦等诸相紧密相连。究竟世间愈上乘道非由俗道之因缘而起,于断灭果上无弊故。且道相种种联系,现证先证,相续连续。故《阿含》所说多种分别修习理不可得别立,应舍离。此理至此当了结。
Odhisokathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 奥迪索论释毕。
4. Jahatikathāvaṇṇanā四、舍弃论释
1. Nasuttāharaṇakathāvaṇṇanā一、鼻经引用论释
§280
280. Yadipi pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘tayo magge bhāvetī’’ti vuttaṃ, maggabhāvanā pana yāvadeva kilesasamucchindanatthāti ñatvā ‘‘kiccasabbhāvanti tīhi pahātabbassa pahīnata’’nti āha. Tattha tīhīti heṭṭhimehi tīhi ariyamaggehi pahātabbassa ajjhattasaṃyojanassa pahīnataṃ samucchindananti attho. Taṃ pana kiccanti adhobhāgiyasaṃyojanesu maggassa pahānābhisamayakiccaṃ. Teneva maggenāti anāgāmimaggeneva. Etaṃ na sametīti evaṃ magguppādato pageva kāmarāgabyāpādā pahīyantīti laddhikittanaṃ iminā maggassa kiccasabbhāvakathanena na sameti na yujjati. Tasmāti iminā yathāvuttameva virodhaṃ paccāmasati. Pahīnānanti vikkhambhitānaṃ. Yo hi jhānalābhī jhānena yathāvikkhambhite kilese maggena samucchindati, so idhādhippeto. Tenāha ‘‘dassanamagge…pe… adhippāyo’’ti.
280.虽有巴利文中说“在三道上修习”,但所谓道的修习乃为斩断烦恼而说,乃知“任务存在于应舍弃的三业”。其中“这三”是指下三圣道,即断除内心三结的断除。所称“任务”,是指在下三结中断除道的修习任务,尤其是无来处道。此义非指三者合而为一,或某因缘使欲、嗔自动消除,而此道任务说并非合一或相应,无法归并。故此理得以对治矛盾。所谓“舍弃”,是指心中烦恼如禅定获入后,烦恼随禅定而断。故云:“见道……为主”。
Jahatikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 舍弃论释毕。
5. Sabbamatthītikathāvaṇṇanā5. 一切存在论之阐释
1. Vādayuttivaṇṇanā1. 论诤方法之阐释
§282
282.Sabbaṃatthīti ettha yasmā paccuppannaṃ viya atītānāgatampi dharamānasabhāvanti paravādino laddhi, tasmā sabbanti kālavibhāgato atītādibhedaṃ sabbaṃ. So pana ‘‘yampi natthi, tampi atthī’’ti kālavimuttassa vasena anuyogo, taṃ atippasaṅgadassanavasena paravādipaṭiññāya dosāropanaṃ. Nayadassanaṃ vā atītānāgatānaṃ natthibhāvassa. Atthīti pana ayaṃ atthibhāvo yasmā desakālākāradhammehi vinā na hoti, tasmā taṃ tāva tehi saddhiṃ yojetvā anuyogaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sabbattha sabbamatthī’’tiādinā pāḷi pavattā. Tattha yadipi sabbatthāti idaṃ sāmaññavacanaṃ, taṃ pana yasmā visesaniviṭṭhaṃ hoti, parato ca sabbesūti dhammā vibhāgato vuccanti, tasmā oḷārikassa pākaṭassa rūpadhammasamudāyassa vasena atthaṃ dassetuṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘sabbatthāti sabbasmiṃ sarīre’’ti vuttaṃ, nidassanamattaṃ vā etaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathā ca kāṇādakāpilehi paṭiññāyamānā ākāsakālādisattapakatipurisā viya paravādinā paṭiññāyamānaṃ sabbaṃ sabbabyāpīti āpannameva hotīti. ‘‘Sabbattha sarīre’’ti ca ‘‘tile tela’’nti viya byāpane bhummanti sarīrapariyāpannena sabbena bhavitabbanti vuttaṃ ‘‘sirasi pādā…pe… attho’’ti.
282.“一切有益”,此处乃因现前、过去与未来诸法皆依时间而异,故称“一切”为时间上的差别合成之义。又言“一切无者亦有”,是由于时段解脱,依缘所系,故诸法在未有时无存于彼,在有时存有,由此断一切怨毒。此“一切有益”与时间上的去留相应之理有关,有教化之用。此处“一切”乃普通言辞,因其具区别而与“一切诸法”为别义,后者谓法的部分诸相。故此注疏云“一切”为肉眼可见诸身之内的法,举例以手足头目为喻,谓一切遍满,盖诸法所摄,浓缩成总摄义。故说“一切即遍满”,如敷满蜡油之三角形,遍满于一身以内。文中有云“头足……然有利益”。
Sabbasmiṃ kāle sabbamatthīti yojanā. Etasmiṃ pakkheyevassa aññavādo paridīpito siyā ‘‘yaṃ atthi, attheva taṃ, yaṃ natthi, nattheva taṃ, asato natthi sambhavo, sato natthi vināso’’ti. Evaṃ sabbenākārena sabbaṃ sabbesu dhammesu sabbaṃ atthīti atthoti sambandho. Imehi pana pakkhehi ‘‘sabbaṃ sabbasabhāvaṃ, anekasattinicitābhāvā asato natthi sambhavo’’ti vādo paridīpito siyā. Yogarahitanti kenaci yuttāyuttalakkhaṇasaṃyogarahitaṃ. Taṃ pana ekasabhāvanti saṃyogarahitaṃ nāma atthato ekasabhāvaṃ, ekadhammoti attho. Etena devavādīnaṃ brahmadassanaṃ atthevātivādo paridīpito siyā. Atthīti pucchatīti yadi sabbamatthīti tava vādo, yathāvuttāya mama diṭṭhiyā sammādiṭṭhibhāvo atthīti ekantena tayā sampaṭicchitabbo, tasmā ‘‘kiṃ so atthī’’ti pucchatīti attho.
“一切时一切有益”谓之联系。对此有不同立场之辩论,谓“有者本即有,无者自然无,非有即无,无处不生,无有则无灭”之理。如此“全体全法的所有益”为所谓利益。对此又有另一立场强调“一切全非本性,因缘生灭乃无常”,此谓无组合性,因缘合成分别。而“一者”,“不合者”实为“一体”意味着同一法则,此为持天人见的极端非正理见。谓利益即问:“若你言一切为利益,则当以正见合乎”,为此提出问题以求正理。
Vādayuttivaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 论诤方法之阐释已毕。
2. Kālasaṃsandanakathāvaṇṇanā2. 时间相续论之阐释
§285
285.Atītā…pe… karitvāti etthāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – atītaṃ anāgatanti rūpassa imaṃ visesaṃ, evaṃ visesaṃ vā rūpaṃ aggahetvā paccuppannatāvisesavisiṭṭharūpameva appiyaṃ paccuppannarūpabhāvānaṃ samānādhikaraṇattā etasmiṃyeva visaye appetabbaṃ, vacīgocaraṃ pāpetabbaṃ satipi nesaṃ visesanavisesitabbatāsaṅkhāte vibhāge tathāpi avibhajitabbaṃ katvāti. Yasmā pana pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘paccuppannanti vā rūpanti vā’’ti paccuppannarūpasaddehi tadatthassa vattabbākāro itisaddehi dassito, tasmā ‘‘paccuppannasaddena…pe… vuttaṃ hotī’’ti āha. Rūpapaññattīti rūpāyatanapaññatti. Sā hi sabhāvadhammupādānā tajjāpaññatti. Tenevāha ‘‘sabhāvaparicchinne pavattā vijjamānapaññattī’’ti. Rūpasamūhaṃ upādāyāti taṃtaṃattapaññattiyā upādānabhūtānaṃ abhāvavibhāvanākārena pavattamānānaṃ rūpadhammānaṃ samūhaṃ upādāya. Upādānupādānampi hi upādānamevāti. Tasmāti samūhupādāyādhīnatāya avijjamānapaññattibhāvato. Vigamāvattabbatāti vigamassa vatthabhāvāpagamassa avattabbatā. Na hi odātatāvigamena avatthaṃ hoti. Na pana yuttā rūpabhāvassa vigamāvattabbatāti yojanā. Rūpabhāvoti ca rūpāyatanasabhāvo cakkhuviññāṇassa gocarabhāvo. Na hi tassa paccuppannabhāvavigame vigamāvattabbatā yuttā.
285.“已往……作成”此是总括意,所谓已往与未来,即指色法中此特殊与其他特殊,排除现前之异而立。以彼等异而不可并论故,此例内亦被称为现前之识。因巴利语“现前”包括色或非色时,言及此义。所谓色限定,乃指色触识的所对境。故言“色受限制而发生之认识”,此即色法之现行有限性。所说色之聚合,是说对色法因执著及断灭之无集合上之认识。这包括诱因、所缘、分别因等,皆固于无知分别的认知限制之中。所谓“无知分别”,即无明所起故。观测因缘相续观照色法实为断灭之理不可断焉。所谓“离别”,非指完全离开,而谓当断色法危险之分离。色法是色根及眼识所对缘中之色的存在,故不容许断色之现前状态分离意。
Kālasaṃsandanakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 时间相续论之阐释已毕。
Vacanasodhanavaṇṇanā语词净化之阐释
§288
288.Anāgataṃ vā paccuppannaṃ vāti ettha vā-saddo aniyamattho yathā ‘‘khadire vā bandhitabbaṃ palāse vā’’ti. Tasmā ‘‘hutvā hotī’’ti ettha hoti-saddo anāgatapaccuppannesu yaṃ kiñci padhānaṃ katvā sambandhaṃ labhatīti dassento ‘‘anāgataṃ…pe… daṭṭhabba’’nti āha. Tattha paccuppannaṃ hontanti paccuppannaṃ jāyamānaṃ paccuppannabhāvaṃ labhantaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘taññeva anāgataṃ taṃ paccuppannanti laddhivasenā’’ti. Tampi hutvā hotīti yaṃ anāgataṃ hutvā paccuppannabhāvappattiyā ‘‘hutvā hotī’’ti vuttaṃ, kiṃ tadapi puna hutvā hotīti pucchati. Tabbhāvāvigamatoti paccuppannabhāvato hutvāhotibhāvānupagamato. Paccuppannābhāvatoti paccuppannatāya abhāvato.
288.“未来或现前”一词,此处之“或”表示语义不确定,如“吉槃长或绑之叶枝”隐喻。由此谓“完成即为存在”,即“已成即为存在”之意,表明在未来转现前间有重要联系。言“未来已成即成现前”,是说未来者乃依现前状态而成。如言“此者即未来者之现前”,即为将未来集中于现前去认知。故云“未来即现前”,且言“已成即为存在”而非反复论之道理。所谓“已成即存”,是由现前状态之后的已成性而来。所谓“现前无”,是指现前之存在状态的缺失。
Vacanaṃarahatīti iminā vacanamatte na koci dosoti dasseti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yadipi tassa puna hutvā bhūtassa puna hutvāhotibhāvo natthi, punappunaṃ ñāpetabbatāya pana dutiyaṃ tato parampi tathā vattabbataṃ arahatīti ‘‘āmantā’’ti paṭijānātīti. Dhammeti sabhāvadhamme. Tappaṭikkhepato adhamme abhāvadhamme. Tenāha ‘‘sasavisāṇe’’ti.
‘‘Vacanaṃ arahati’’者,谓此语仅止于语词而无任何过失显现。此义乃谓——虽然彼者曾为已成,然已成之状态,复无复有;但须反复知记之故,方当次第如此宣说,故谓阿拉汉为“导师”。“法”即律法之义,“违犯律法”即非律法之义,因此说‘‘sasavisāṇe’’。
Paṭikkhittanayenāti ‘‘hutvā hoti, hutvā hotī’’ti ettha pubbe yadetaṃ tayā ‘‘anāgataṃ hutvā paccuppannaṃ hotī’’ti vadatā ‘‘taṃyeva anāgataṃ taṃ paccuppanna’’nti laddhivasena ‘‘anāgataṃ vā paccuppannaṃ vā hutvā hotī’’ti vuttaṃ, ‘‘kiṃ te tampi hutvā hotī’’ti pucchite yo paravādinā hutvā bhūtassa puna hutvāabhāvato ‘‘na hevā’’ti paṭikkhepo kato, tena paṭikkhittanayena. Svāyaṃ yadeva rūpādi anāgataṃ, tadeva paccuppannanti satipi atthābhede anāgatapaccuppannanti pana attheva kālabhedoti taṃkālabhedavirodhāya paṭikkhepo pavattoti āha ‘‘paṭikkhittanayenāti kālanānattenā’’ti. Tena hi so ayañca paṭikkhepo nīto pavattitoti. Paṭiññātanayenāti idampi yathāvuttapaṭikkhepānantaraṃ yaṃ paṭiññātaṃ, taṃ sandhāyāha. Yathā hi sā paṭiññā atthābhedena nītā pavattitā, tathāyampi. Tenevāha ‘‘atthānānattenā’’ti, anāgatādippabhedāya kālapaññattiyā upādānabhūtassa atthassa abhedenāti attho. Yathā upādānabhūtarūpādiatthābhedepi tesaṃ khaṇattayānāvatti taṃsamaṅgitā anāgatapaccuppannabhāvāvattitā, tathā tattha vuccamānā hutvāhotibhāvā yathākkamaṃ purimapacchimesu pavattitā purimapacchimakiriyāti katvāti imamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘atthānānattaṃ…pe… paṭijānātī’’ti vatvā puna ‘‘atthānānattameva hī’’tiādinā tameva atthaṃ samattheti. Yathā pana ‘‘taṃ jīvaṃ taṃ sarīra’’nti paṭijānantassa jīvova sarīraṃ, sarīrameva jīvoti jīvasarīrānaṃ anaññattaṃ āpajjati, evaṃ ‘‘taññeva anāgataṃ taṃ paccuppanna’’nti ca paṭijānantassa anāgatapaccuppannānaṃ anaññattaṃ āpannanti paccuppannānāgatesu vuttā hotibhāvahutvābhāvā anāgatapaccuppannesupi āpajjeyyunti vuttaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘evaṃ sante anāgatampi hutvāhoti nāma, paccuppannampi hutvāhotiyeva nāmā’’ti.
所谓‘‘paṭikkhittanaya’’即‘‘已成者为已成,已成者为已然’’。此前,此处言说应是指那句‘‘未来已成,现在已然’’等。谓此 ‘‘未来即为未来,现在即为现在’’之说成立。问曰:何以二者未来为已成现象不成立?答曰:此乃已成者的否定,即为反证,名为paṭikkhittanaya。若自身之色等为未来者,则亦未来即现在,实指义上之分别时间差异与非差异故,有反对时间差异的反证作用,故言‘‘paṭikkhittanaya’’即‘‘不同时间之谓否定’’。彼即因此反证而被引起乃至生起。所谓‘‘paṭiññātanaya’’即‘‘已决之反证’’,此亦紧随上述的反证而生起的事理。既然该已决之理起于义差别,故谓‘‘atthānānattena’’,指未来等不同分别因时间观念造作引起非差异之理。譬如由色身等取舍引起意义差别或时间差异非同之理,亦由此分类中未来与现在之有无皆依其道理而转变。且说‘‘生命即是色身’’者,谓认识者认为生命即色身,而色身本体无二,此为生命色身非二一体之表现。由此理说“只有未来和现在的不同非实有”,未来与现在皆成立其有无。故注解云“未来若有即为已成,现在若有即为已然”,此乃说未来与现在实则为同一实体,只因分时不同而有异称。
Anuññātapañhassāti ‘‘taññeva anāgataṃ taṃ paccuppannanti? Āmantā’’ti evaṃ atthānānattaṃ sandhāya anuññātassa atthassa. Ñātuṃ icchito hi attho pañho. Doso vuttoti anāgataṃ hutvā paccuppannabhūtassa puna anāgataṃ hutvā paccuppannabhāvāpattisaṅkhāto doso vutto purimanaye . Pacchimanaye pana anāgatapaccuppannesu ekekassa hutvāhotibhāvāpattisaṅkhāto doso vuttoti attho. Paṭikkhittapañhanti ‘‘taṃyeva anāgataṃ taṃ paccuppannanti? Na hevaṃ vattabbe’’ti evaṃ kālanānattaṃ sandhāya paṭikkhittapañhaṃ. Tenāti anāgatapaccuppannānaṃ hotihutvābhāvapaṭikkhepena. Codetīti anāgataṃ tena hoti nāma, paccuppannaṃ tena hutvā nāma, ubhayampi anaññattā ubhayasabhāvanti codeti. Etthāti ‘‘hutvā hotī’’ti etasmiṃ pañhe kathaṃ hoti dosoti codetīti. ‘‘Tassevā’’ti pariharati. Kathaṃ katvā codanā, kathañca katvā parihāro? Anujānanapaṭikkhepānaṃ bhinnavisayatāya codanā, atthābhedakālabhedavisayattā abhinnādhāratāya tesaṃ parihāro. Tassevāti hi paravādino evāti attho.
‘‘未经解答之疑’’即曰‘‘未来即为现在乎?导师?’’,此是基于义差别演说所生成疑问。所谓“怨恨说”,即谓未来和现在的有无经验分别对立所致。反问即‘‘未来即为现在乎?不然也’’,此基于时间差异产生之疑问。因未来与现在之法对立故生怀疑,名为paṭikkhittapañha。‘‘问者’’谓未来即为现在乎?‘‘答者’’谓非也。此即未来即为现在之疑问与反驳。问者言‘‘如何说未来即是现在,如何说未来不是现在?’’答者反驳前说法,表明用分时悟理不同而去除疑问,而言‘‘他者亦然’’即答者等级称否定者。此即反对者之立场。此故称‘‘tasseva’’谓彼反对言说者之立场也。
Tadubhayaṃ gahetvāti ‘‘taṃ anāgataṃ taṃ paccuppanna’’nti ubhayaṃ ekajjhaṃ gahetvā. Ekekanti tesu ekekaṃ. Ekekamevāti ubhayaṃ ekajjhaṃ aggahetvā ekekameva visuṃ visuṃ imasmiṃ pakkhe tathā na yuttanti attho. Esa nayoti atidesaṃ katvā saṃkhittattā taṃ dubbiññeyyanti ‘‘anāgatassa hī’’tiādinā vivarati. Paṭijānitabbaṃ siyā anāgatapaccuppannānaṃ yathākkamaṃ hotihutvābhāvatoti adhippāyo. ‘‘Yadetaṃ tayā’’tiādinā pavatto saṃvaṇṇanānayo purimanayo, tattha hi ‘‘yadi te anāgataṃ hutvā’’tiādinā hutvāhotibhāvo codito. ‘‘Aparo nayo’’tiādiko dutiyanayo. Tattha hi ‘‘anāgatassa…pe… hutvāhotiyeva nāmā’’ti anāgatādīsu ekekassa hutvāhotināmatā coditā.
‘‘采择其两个’’者谓‘‘采择未来与现在二者之一’’。‘‘各者’’即于二中各别者, ‘‘各取一者’’谓拿取其中一者为是。若谓二者互立,各取各立,则彼境理皆不当也。此为简言之辩论法,即持相反之理,显两难不可解也。其应知义谓:未来和现在之有无应分别判定,是未来或现在有已成或已然之状态也含于其中。故曰‘‘此乃两说之一,彼则另一说’’。于未来而言被质疑未来是否已然,今则说明未来亦具已有或未有状态之说。
Vacanasodhanavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 语句校正的解释完毕。
Atītañāṇādikathāvaṇṇanā关于过去智等论题的解释。
§290
290.Kathaṃvuccatīti kasmā vuttaṃ. Tenāti hi iminā dutiyapucchāya ‘‘atītaṃ ñāṇa’’nti idaṃ paccāmaṭṭhaṃ, tañca paccuppannaṃ ñāṇaṃ, atītadhammārammaṇatāya atītanti vuttaṃ. Tenāha aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘puna puṭṭho atītārammaṇaṃ paccuppannaṃ ñāṇa’’ntiādi.
290. “谓何故如此说?”即问其由。故以第二问中谓‘‘过去之知识’’为已成前因,谓‘‘过去知识’’为过去境界之显现,名为过去。经注释曰“再次问其过去之境与现在之知识”之说,依次陈述。
Atītañāṇādikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 关于过去智等论题的解释完毕。
Arahantādikathāvaṇṇanā关于阿拉汉等论题的解释。
§291
291. ‘‘Arahaṃ khīṇāsavo’’tiādinā suttavirodho pākaṭoti idameva dassento ‘‘yuttivirodho…pe… daṭṭhabbo’’ti āha. Tattha anānattanti aviseso. Evamādikoti ādi-saddena katakiccatābhāvo anohitabhāratāti evamādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo.
291. ‘‘阿拉汉已断烦恼’’等经文与经文相违者,显明谓“理应不同……”此意也。此异指无异,谓凡“如此始”“如此终”之语义无偏废,故此类异表所综摄者,应如是观察。
Arahantādikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 关于阿拉汉等论题的解释完毕。
Padasodhanakathāvaṇṇanā关于词句校正论题的解释。
§295
295. Yo atītasaddābhidheyyo attho, so atthisaddābhidheyyoti dvepi samānādhikaraṇatthāti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘atītaatthisaddānaṃ ekatthattā’’ti, na, atītasaddābhidheyyasseva atthisaddābhidheyyattā. Tenāha ‘‘atthisaddatthassa ca nvātītabhāvato’’ti. Tena kiṃ siddhanti āha ‘‘atītaṃ nvātītaṃ, nvātītañca atītaṃ hotī’’ti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yadi tava matena atītaṃ atthi, atthi ca nvātītanti atītañca no atītaṃ siyā, tathā atthi no atītaṃ atītañca no atītaṃ atītaṃ siyāti, yathā ‘‘atītaṃ atthī’’ti ettha atītameva atthīti nāyaṃ niyamo gahetabbo anatītassapi atthibhāvassa icchitattā. Tenevāha ‘‘atthi siyā atītaṃ, siyā nvātīta’’nti. Yena hi ākārena atītassa atthibhāvo paravādinā icchito, tenākārena anatītassa anāgatassa paccuppannassa ca so icchito. Kena pana ākārena icchitoti ? Saṅkhatākārena. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘tenātītaṃ nvātītaṃ, nvātītaṃ atīta’’nti. Tasmā atītaṃ atthiyevāti evamettha niyamo gahetabbo. Atthibhāve hi atītaṃ niyamitaṃ, na atīte atthibhāvo niyamito, ‘‘na pana nibbānaṃ atthī’’ti ettha pana nibbānameva atthīti ayampi niyamo sambhavatīti so eva gahetabbo. Yadipi hi nibbānaṃ paramatthato atthibhāvaṃ upādāya uttarapadāvadhāraṇaṃ labbhati tadaññassapi abhāvato, tathāpi asaṅkhatākārena aññassa anupalabbhanato tathā nibbānameva atthīti purimapadāvadhāraṇe atthe gayhamāne ‘‘atthi siyā nibbānaṃ, siyā no nibbāna’’nti codanā anokāsā. Atītādīsu pana purimapadāvadhāraṇaṃ paravādinā na gahitanti natthettha atippasaṅgo. Aggahaṇañcassa pāḷito eva viññāyati. Evamettha atītādīnaṃ atthitaṃ vadantassa paravādissevāyaṃ iṭṭhavighātadosāpatti, na pana nibbānassa atthitaṃ vadantassa sakavādissāti. Paṭipādanā patiṭṭhāpanā veditabbā.
295. 有人谓「过往之声应称意义」,即为意义和声两者共有相同所在,称为『过往意义之统一』,但实际上这并非仅为过往意义之所有义。故有言「虽为意义,但不属于过往存在之义」。那么如何成立?说「过往与非过往,非过往又是过往」。此说意在:若依你的看法,过往存在,则非过往亦存在,过往与非过往不可能齐存。如此则当承认「过往即存在」,但这里的过往应理解为存在之过往,不可取为非存在且欲求的过往存在。正因如是,谓「存在乃过往,存在也为非过往」。因某种缘故,过往存在之义为他人所欲,因此该义亦为非过往存在及未来存在有所欲者。何因欲求?由被制约之形态故。有言「因此过往即非过往,非过往即过往」。所以应以存在为过往。又因过往的存在因他人口欲,即使无欲,则未来与现在亦同样受欲。然何缘欲?为依赖于有形有相故。由此有言「因此过往是非过往,非过往是过往」。由此当承认过往存在,此处规则应如此采纳。存在之义,过往内受制约,而非过往的存在则无制约。又言「涅槃不具存在」,涅槃当作是存在,此规则亦应采纳。虽然涅槃自体终极真实之意义是无存在,因依「执者」及「后续条件持有」而得,虽他人因无制约无法见,然在先行条件体现时,即使尚未明了,亦有「存在涅槃、不存在涅槃」之呼应作催促。对过往等述及,先行条件的他人欲望不相关,此非甚深依缘之文。综上,佛陀所称之过往等有意义,唯对持他人观点述说过往意义者,生此异见与误解,不应与说涅槃意味者相混。应分别体认其实践根基。
Etthāha ‘‘atītaṃ atthī’’tiādinā kiṃ panāyaṃ atītānāgatānaṃ paramatthato atthibhāvo adhippeto, udāhu na paramatthato. Kiñcettha – yadi tāva paramatthato, sabbakālaṃ atthibhāvato saṅkhārānaṃ sassatabhāvo āpajjati, na ca taṃ yuttaṃ āgamavirodhato yuttivirodhato ca. Atha na paramatthato, ‘‘sabbamatthī’’tiādikā codanā niratthikā siyā, na niratthikā. So hi paravādī ‘‘yaṃ kiñci rūpaṃ atītānāgata’’ntiādinā atītānāgatānampi khandhabhāvassa vuttattā asati ca atīte kusalākusalassa kammassa āyatiṃ phalaṃ kathaṃ bhaveyya, tattha ca pubbenivāsañāṇādi anāgate ca anāgataṃsañāṇādi kathaṃ pavatteyya, tasmā attheva paramatthato atītānāgatanti yaṃ paṭijānāti, taṃ sandhāya ayaṃ katāti. Ekantena cetaṃ sampaṭicchitabbaṃ. Yepi ‘‘sabbaṃ atthī’’ti vadanti atītaṃ anāgataṃ paccuppannañca, te sabbatthivādāti.
例如以「过往存在」等言论,于何意指过往与未来的终极存在?非终极者。如说若终极者,则诸存在之行永恒长存,且无不相容,不会与入道争持相违。若非终极,则「一切存在」等言无益非无益。此处他人持「一切物质即是过往与未来」等见,基于过往与未来俱属五蕴之流转,既无定有,如何产生善恶业果报?且有关前世记忆与未来知识如何运作?故此语仅指终极意义之过往未来,即本论所承认者。此事须专心如实琢磨认知。所有称「一切存在」包括过往未来现行者,则诠释皆各异,皆属普遍之争论。
Catubbidhā cete te sabbatthivādā. Tattha keci bhāvaññattikā. Te hi ‘‘yathā suvaṇṇabhājanassa bhinditvā aññathā kariyamānassa saṇṭhānasseva aññathattaṃ, na vaṇṇādīnaṃ, yathā ca khīraṃ dadhibhāvena pariṇamantaṃ rasavīriyavipāke pariccajati, na vaṇṇaṃ, evaṃ dhammāpi anāgataddhuno paccuppannaddhaṃ saṅkamantā anāgatabhāvameva jahanti, na attano sabhāvaṃ. Tathā paccuppannaddhuno atītaddhaṃ saṅkame’’ti vadanti. Keci lakkhaṇaññattikā, te pana ‘‘tīsu addhāsu pavattamāno dhammo atīto atītalakkhaṇayutto, itaralakkhaṇehi ayutto. Tathā anāgato paccuppanno ca. Yathā puriso ekissā itthiyā ratto aññāsu aratto’’ti vadanti. Aññe avatthaññattikā, te ‘‘tīsu addhāsu pavattamāno dhammo taṃ taṃ avatthaṃ patvā añño aññaṃ niddisīyati avatthantarato, na sabhāvato. Yathā ekaṃ akkhaṃ ekaṅge nikkhittaṃ ekanti vuccati, sataṅge satanti, sahassaṅge sahassanti, evaṃsampadamida’’nti. Apare aññathaññattikā, te pana ‘‘tīsu addhāsu pavattamāno dhammo taṃ taṃ apekkhitvā tadaññasabhāvena vuccati. Yathā taṃ ekā itthī mātāti ca vuccati dhītā’’ti ca. Evamete cattāro sabbatthivādā.
此诸普遍论者,分为四类。一类为性质差异论者,其言「犹如将碎金重新聚合形成另一集合,乃性质异而非颜色等差异,犹若牛奶转化为酪,质变非颜色。如此诸法亦当舍弃未来之相,仅保留现行,非其本质。现行舍弃过往,过往舍弃现行。」另一类曰特征差异论者,云「于三现行中,法带有过往之相,非带他相。未来现行亦然,例如男子对一女子爱好,对他女子不爱。」再有意义差异论者,称「三现行法各异其义,即便指涉相异,非指其本体。如一单字含义一,一百字则含义百千。」又有依他差异论者,云「三现行法相互借依谓之不同,如一女子既是母亦为女儿。」斯乃四类普遍论说。
Tesu paṭhamo pariṇāmavāditāya kāpilapakkhikesu pakkhipitabboti. Dutiyassapi kālasaṅkaro āpajjati sabbassa sabbalakkhaṇayogato. Catutthassapi saṅkarova. Ekasseva dhammassa pavattikkhaṇe tayopi kālā samodhānaṃ gacchanti. Purimapacchimakkhaṇā hi atītānāgatā, majjhimo paccuppannoti. Tatiyassa pana avatthaññattikassa natthi saṅkaro dhammakiccena kālavavatthānato. Dhammo hi sakiccakkhaṇe paccuppanno, tato pubbe anāgato, pacchā atītoti.
对第一转变论者,当反对于迦比罗派与执持世俗法一起论之。第二及第四者则关系时间混淆。任何法起现亦有同时同时消亡之理。过去未来分别在前后?正如过去与未来在先在后。第三类等无时间观念混乱及执着之事。法于当下现起,先为未来,后为过去。
Tattha yadi atītampi dharamānasabhāvatāya atthi anāgatampi, kasmā taṃ atītanti vuccati anāgatanti vā, nanu vuttaṃ ‘‘dhammakiccena kālavavatthānato’’ti. Yadi evaṃ paccuppannassa cakkhussa kiṃ kiccaṃ, anavasesapaccayasamavāye phaluppādanaṃ. Evaṃ sati anāgatassapi cassa tena bhavitabbaṃ atthibhāvatoti lakkhaṇasaṅkaro siyā. Idañcettha vattabbaṃ, teneva sabhāvena sato dhammassa kiccaṃ, kiccakaraṇe ko vibandho, yena kadāci karoti kadāci na karoti paccayasamavāyabhāvato, kiccassa samavāyābhāvatoti ce? Taṃ na, niccaṃ atthibhāvassa icchitattā. Tato eva ca addhunaṃ avavatthānaṃ. Dhammo hi teneva sabhāvena vijjamāno kasmā kadāci atītoti vuccati kadāci anāgatoti kālassa vavatthānaṃ na siyā. Yo hi dhammo ajāto, so anāgato. Yo jāto na ca niruddho, so paccuppanno. Yo niruddho, so atīto. Idamevettha vattabbaṃ. Yadi yathā vattamānaṃ atthi , tathā atītaṃ anāgatañca atthi, tassa tathā sato ajātatā niruddhatā ca kena hotīti. Teneva hi sabhāvena sato dhammassa kathamidaṃ sijjhati ajātoti vā niruddhoti vā. Kiṃ tassa pubbe nāhosi, yassa abhāvato ajātoti vuccati, kiñca pacchā natthi, yassa abhāvato niruddhoti vuccati. Tasmā sabbathāpi addhattayaṃ na sijjhati, yadi ahutvā saṅgati hutvā ca vinassatīti na sampaṭicchanti. Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ ‘‘saṅkhatalakkhaṇayogato na sassatabhāvappasaṅgo’’ti, tayidaṃ kevalaṃ vācāvatthumattaṃ udayavayāsambhavato, atthi ca nāma sabbadā so dhammo, na ca niccoti kutoyaṃ vācāyutti.
若过往存在,亦如未来存在,应何以称过往或未来?语有云:「法因时而现起」。若现有眼识,则生果报。如是念住未来亦应存在判定。此处当注意,时法与法之关联,若无持续则不成立。如此今法说起时,何以有时称作过去,时称作未来?若法未生为未来,已生非阻为现行,已阻为过往。此即时理。若如所言存在,则过往未来俱存,何以时有生有灭?时随生灭,不尽永恒。对曾无者谓之未生,无后者曰阻灭。故普遍无止息二元有。虽言「依行相无恒持」者,仅语词含义,乃指生灭无常,而非永恒。
Sabhāvo sabbadā atthi, nicco dhammo na vuccati;
性质恒存者,谓非永恒法。
Dhammo sabhāvato nāñño, aho dhammesu kosalaṃ.
法是自体所具,无有他法,至善者在法中也。
Yañca vuttaṃ ‘‘yaṃ kiñci rūpaṃ atītānāgata’’ntiādinā atītānāgatānaṃ khandhabhāvassa vuttattā atthevāti, vadāma. Atītaṃ bhūtapubbaṃ, anāgataṃ yaṃ sati paccaye bhavissati, tadubhayassapi ruppanādisabhāvānātivattanato rūpakkhandhādibhāvo vutto. Yathādhammasabhāvānātivattanato atītā dhammā anāgatā dhammāti, na dharamānasabhāvatāya. Ko ca evamāha ‘‘paccuppannaṃ viya taṃ atthī’’ti. Kathaṃ panetaṃ atthīti? Atītānāgatasabhāvena. Idaṃ pana taveva upaṭṭhitaṃ, kathaṃ taṃ atītaṃ anāgatañca vuccati, yadi niccakālaṃ atthīti.
所谓“凡诸色相无论过去未来”之语,乃说明过去未来蕴的境界特性,我等称之为过去者为已经过去,未来者为尚未到来,皆因超越法的自性而言,非指持久不变之自体。又有人说“此理犹如现在”,如何理解此理呢?是依过去未来诸法之性。现在法正为汝所现,何以称之为过去未来?如曰恒常之理,则为谬论。
Yaṃ pana ‘‘na tāva kālaṃ karoti, yāva na taṃ pāpaṃ byantī hotī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.250) sutte vuttaṃ, taṃ yasmiñca santāne kammaṃ katūpacitaṃ, tattha tenāhitaṃ taṃphaluppādanasamatthataṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na atītassa kammassa dharamānasabhāvattā. Tathā sati sakena bhāvena vijjamānaṃ kathaṃ taṃ atītaṃ nāma siyā. Itthañcetaṃ evaṃ sampaṭicchitabbaṃ, yaṃ saṅkhārā ahutvā sambhavanti, hutvā pativenti tesaṃ udayato pubbe vayato ca pacchā na kāci ṭhiti nāma atthi, yato atītānāgataṃ atthīti vucceyya. Tena vuttaṃ –
如经典所言“未至时不生恶业”,“恶果未成熟时”,谓于某世代因缘中,业虽已造,果尚未生起,此异于过去业之恒常存在。依此义谓现有之法,何以名为过去?答曰,须明造作之因缘已灭,所生之法亦灭而不常存,故以过去未来名之。过去未来之义,正是于此。
‘‘Anidhānagatā bhaggā, puñjo natthi anāgate;
“无根果实,过去无积,
Uppannā yepi tiṭṭhanti, āragge sāsapūpamā’’ti. (mahāni. 10, 39);
虽生之法亦如初叶之芽”,犹如大尼柯耶所云。
Yadi cānāgataṃ paramatthato siyā, ahutvā sambhavantīti vattuṃ na sakkā. Paccuppannakāle ahutvā sambhavantīti ce? Na, dhammappavattimattattā kālassa. Atha attano sabhāvena ahutvā sambhavantīti, siddhametaṃ anāgataṃ paramatthato natthīti. Yañca vuttaṃ ‘‘asati atīte kusalākusalassa kammassa āyatiṃ phalaṃ kathaṃ bhaveyyā’’ti, na kho panettha atītakammato phaluppatti icchitā, atha kho tassa katattā tadāhitavisesato santānato. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘kāmāvacarassa kusalassa kammassa katattā upacitattā vipākaṃ cakkhuviññāṇaṃ uppannaṃ hotī’’ti (dha. sa. 431). Yassa pana atītānāgataṃ paramatthato atthi, tassa phalaṃ niccameva atthīti kiṃ tattha kammassa sāmatthiyaṃ. Uppādane ce, siddhamidaṃ ahutvā bhavatīti. Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ ‘‘asati atītānāgate kathaṃ tattha ñāṇaṃ pavatteyyā’’ti, yathā taṃ ālambaṇaṃ, taṃ tathā atthi, kathañca taṃ ālambaṇaṃ, ahosi bhavissati cāti. Na hi koci atītaṃ anussaranto atthīti anussarati, atha kho ahosīti. Yathā pana vattamānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ anubhūtaṃ, tathā taṃ atītaṃ anussarati. Yathā ca vattamānaṃ bhavissati, tathā buddhādīhi gayhati. Yadi ca taṃ tatheva atthi, vattamānameva taṃ siyā. Atha natthi, siddhaṃ ‘‘asantaṃ ñāṇassa ārammaṇaṃ hotī’’ti. Vijjamānaṃ vā hi cittasaññātaṃ avijjamānaṃ vā ārammaṇaṃ etesaṃ atthīti ārammaṇā, cittacetasikā, na vijjamānaṃyeva ārabbha pavattanato, tasmā paccuppannameva dharamānasabhāvaṃ na atītānāgatanti na tiṭṭhati sabbatthivādo. Keci pana ‘‘na atītādīnaṃ atthitāpaṭiññāya sabbatthivādā, atha kho āyatanasabbassa atthitāpaṭiññāyā’’ti vadanti, tesaṃ matena sabbeva sāsanikā sabbatthivādā siyunti.
若未来指究竟意义,则“未现而生”之义不能成立。诸法因缘转变,时节而流转,如“过去未来无常”,故未来不可断言。又明言“业之善恶,眼识因缘而生”,此即所作诸业及其果报,乃由现存心识及因缘所成。若过去未来乃真有,果理当绝,实则非也。
Padasodhanakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 词句清净论释毕。
Sabbamatthītikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 一切义论释毕。
6. Atītakkhandhādikathā6. 过去蕴等论
1. Nasuttasādhanakathāvaṇṇanā1. 无经证成论释
§297
297. ‘‘Atītaṃ anāgataṃ paccuppanna’’nti ayaṃ kālavibhāgaparicchinno vohāro dhammānaṃ taṃ taṃ avatthāvisesaṃ upādāya paññatto. Dhammo hi sakiccakkhaṇe paccuppanno, tato pubbe anāgato, pacchā atītoti vuttovāyamattho. Tattha yadipi dhammā aniccatāya anavaṭṭhitā, avatthā pana tesaṃ yathāvuttā vavatthitāti tadupādānā kālapaññattipi vavatthitā eva. Na hi atītādi anāgatādibhāvena voharīyati, khandhādipaññatti pana anapekkhitakālavisesā. Tīsupi hi kālesu rūpakkhandho rūpakkhandhova, tathā sesā khandhā āyatanadhātuyo ca. Evamavaṭṭhite yasmā paravādī ‘‘atthī’’ti imaṃ paccuppannaniyataṃ vohāraṃ atītānāgatesupi āropeti, tasmā so addhasaṅkaraṃ karoti. Paramatthato avijjamāne vijjamāne katvā voharatīti tato vivecetuṃ ‘‘atītaṃ khandhā’’tiādikā ayaṃ kathā āraddhā.
“过去、未来、现在”,此乃以时间区分之教法术语,是依各法的不同个别内容而被称说的说法。因法在作用现时为现行,先为未至,后为已逝而称“过去”。其中所有因无常而不周具之法,依其理本质被阐明者,为此类时间区分的具体依据。并非诸法因过去等时间性质而有效,而是对五蕴等概念而言,其时间分别不影响其称谓。三期中,色蕴即色蕴,其余蕴及六入界、十八界亦然。由此,若他人指称“存在”时,将现前定性的说法套用于过去未来,则生妄解。从究竟义观之,正因无明而有分别业用,需辨别“过去蕴”等说法的初起。
Yasmā pana ruppanādisabhāve atītādibhedabhinne dhamme ekajjhaṃ gahetvā tattha rāsaṭṭhaṃ upādāya khandhapaññatti, cakkhurūpādīsu kāraṇādiatthaṃ suññataṭṭhañca upādāya āyatanapaññatti dhātupaññatti ca, tasmā sā addhattayasādhāraṇā, na atītādipaññatti viya addhavisesādhiṭṭhānāti āha ‘‘khandhādibhāvāvijahanato atītānāgatāna’’nti. Te panete atītādike khandhādike viya sabhāvadhammato sañjānanto paravādī ‘‘atthī’’ti paṭijānātīti āha ‘‘atītānāgatānaṃ atthitaṃ icchantassā’’ti. Sesamettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva.
因于色等诸法的本质上,过去未来等时间分别对立,归于一体的概念上而加诸五蕴等概念名称。于眼色等缘起因缘、空性等缘起缘灭缘故,生出六入界等概念名称。故此称谓虽有共性,然非如过去未来等时间分别上究竟存在,故称“由五蕴等存在观所起、视为过去未来”的区别说法。此等诸法本性如五蕴等法,闻者据此言曰“存在”,即属分别认知故佛言“欲于过去未来有分别理解”。余下事宜,后将陈说。
‘‘Tayome, bhikkhave, niruttipathā’’ti suttaṃ niruttipathasuttaṃ. Tattha hi paccuppannasseva atthibhāvo vutto, na atītānāgatānaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘atthitāya vāritattā’’ti. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, nibbāna’’nti idaṃ kathanti? Taṃ sabbadā upaladdhito vuttaṃ niccasabhāvañāpanatthaṃ asaṅkhatadhammassa, idha pana saṅkhatadhammānaṃ khaṇattayasamaṅgitāya atthibhāvo na tato pubbe pacchā cāti paññāpanatthaṃ ‘‘yaṃ, bhikkhave, rūpaṃ…pe… na tassa saṅkhā bhavissatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Etena ‘‘atthī’’ti samaññāya anupādānato atītaṃ anāgataṃ paramatthato natthīti dassitaṃ hoti. Imināvūpāyenāti ‘‘khandhādibhāvāvijahanato’’ti evaṃ vuttena hetunā. Upapattisādhanayutti hi idha ‘‘upāyo’’ti vuttā.
“比库啊,三种文义出经”,此为经文中言语解释之经。文中仅说现行意义,不说过去未来意义。由此云“为解说所依之理”。若言“比库啊,涅槃是存在”,此乃谈论无始无终法常在理想,但说结法如风化类诸法,其存在现时即止。故作如说“比库啊,色法……其无常性不再有”,此言在此为要揭示“存在”字因无执故非过去非未来,乃至无常法安立无分别故已终止。如是制度,缘由见于“由五蕴等存在观起故”。此即名“方法”,文中已言。
Nasuttasādhanakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 无经证成论释毕。
2. Suttasādhanakathāvaṇṇanā2. 经证成论释
§298
298.Ete dhammāti ete khandhaāyatanadhātudhammā. Suttāharaṇanti niruttipathasuttāharaṇaṃ. Nesanti atītānāgatānaṃ.
此等诸法,即五蕴六入界诸法。以文言指引,谓引经释义。非指过去未来。
Suttasādhanakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · “以经为证之论”的注释完毕。
Atītakkhandhādikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · “过去诸蕴等之论”的注释完毕。
7. Ekaccaṃatthītikathā七、关于“某些存在”的论
1. Atītādiekaccakathāvaṇṇanā一、“过去等某些存在之论”的注释
§299
299. Ye katūpacitā kusalākusalā dhammā vipākadānāya akatokāsā, katokāsā ca ye ‘‘okāsakatuppannā’’ti vuccanti. Ye ca vippakatavipākā, te sabbepi ‘‘avipakkavipākā’’ti veditabbā. Tesaṃ vipākadānasāmatthiyaṃ anapagatanti adhippāyena paravādī atthitaṃ icchati. Ye pana paravādī sabbena sabbaṃ vipakkavipākā kusalākusalā dhammā, tesaṃ apagatanti natthitaṃ icchati. Tenāha ‘‘atthīti ekaccaṃ atthi ekaccaṃ natthī’’tiādi. Evaṃ icchantassa pana paravādino yathā avipākesupi ekaccaṃ natthīti āpajjati, evaṃ vipakkavipākesu avipakkavipākesu ca āpajjatevāti dassetuṃ ‘‘avipakkavipākā dhammā ekacce’’tiādinā pāḷi pavattā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ rāsīnaṃ vasenā’’tiādi. Vohāravasenāti phalassa anuparamavohāravasena, hetukiccaṃ pana anuparataṃ anupacchinnaṃ atthīti laddhiyaṃ ṭhitattā codetabbova. Avicchedavasena pavattamānañhi phalassa pabandhavohāraṃ paravādī vohārato atthīti icchati, hetu panassa kammaṃ paramatthato ca kammūpacayavādibhāvato pattiappattisabhāvatādayo viya cittavippayutto kammūpacayo nāma eko saṅkhāradhammo avipanno, sopi tasseva vevacananti paravādī. Yaṃ sandhāyāha –
谓不正当之善恶法,因果果报分别为不合时、合时者,称为“合时现起”和“不合时现起”。同时,彼等不成熟之果报,皆属“不成熟之果报”。就其果报尚未成熟,谓“未至”。说法者欲以此喻明彼等相对性。若对果报成熟善恶法一概成就,谓已成熟,则谓之“果报已至”无疑。故有言“有所存在,有所不存在”等。若论及不成熟果报,亦有谓之“有所不存在”。如是谓“不成熟果报之一切皆有或无”。其理可见于巴利文“tiṇṇaṃ rāsīnaṃ vasenā”等表达。所谓言辞用法,即以果报相续之理不间断。因果关系中,业为究竟因,业之生理相续成为业之起因。故业之相续虽未被感知,然亦业之一部分,由心所摄聚,名为“业接续”。说法者即此义。所附文『不造业虽千百劫』,意在说明此理。
‘‘Nappacayanti kammāni, api kappasahassato;
『诸业不消散,纵历千劫已;』
Patvā paccayasāmaggiṃ, kāle paccanti pāṇina’’nti.
诸缘相应而生之法,于所当时即现于众生。
Yañca sandhāya parato paribhogamayapuññakathāya ‘‘paribhogamayaṃ pana cittavippayuttaṃ uppajjatīti laddhiyā paṭijānātī’’ti vakkhati.
外修善业之事,谓心则生清净断灭之境,由此断证而知。
Ekaccaṃatthītikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · “某些存在之论”的注释完毕。
8. Satipaṭṭhānakathāvaṇṇanā八、“念处之论”的注释
§301
301.Paramatthasatipaṭṭhānattāti etena lokuttarāya eva sammāsatiyā tatthāpi maggabhūtāya nippariyāyena satipaṭṭhānabhāvo niyyānikattā itarāya pariyāyenāti dasseti. Maggaphalasammāsatiyā dhammānussatibhāvapariyāyo atthīti ‘‘lokiyalokuttarasatipaṭṭhānasamudāyabhūtassā’’ti vuttaṃ. Satisamudāyabhūtassa na satigocarabhūtassāti adhippāyo. Satigocarassa hi satipaṭṭhānataṃ codetuṃ pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘cakkhāyatanaṃ satipaṭṭhāna’’nti āraddhaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbadhammānaṃ pabhedapucchāvasena vutta’’nti. Suttasādhanāyaṃ pana paṭhamaṃ lokiyasatipaṭṭhānavasena, dutiyaṃ missakavasena, tatiyaṃ lokuttaravasena dassitanti veditabbaṃ.
所谓究竟念处,借此示现于世间超越者的正念,且为通达圣道本质者,具足圆满之念处身心性质。此念处乃通达正道果报之正念,涵摄法的忆念遍照故曰。当宣说正念三层,即初为世间境界,次为虚妄失惑,第三乃出世之正念,宜如此解。
Satipaṭṭhānakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 念处论注释结束。
9. Hevatthikathāvaṇṇanā九、『确实存在』论注释
§304
304. Hevatthikathāyaṃ ‘‘sabbo dhammo sakabhāvena atthi parabhāvena natthī’’ti pavatto paravādīvādo yathā vibhajja paṭipucchā vā na byākātabbo, evaṃ ekaṃsato na byākātabbo visesābhāvato, kevalaṃ ṭhapanīyapakkhe tiṭṭhatīti adhippāyenāha ‘‘avattabbuttarenā’’ti. Yathā hi sabbe vādā sappaṭivādāvāti paṭiññā bhūtakathanattā avattabbuttarā upekkhitabbā, evamayampīti veditabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘upekkhitabbenā’’ti. Atha vā avattabbaṃ uttaraṃ avattabbuttaraṃ. Yathā aniccavādinaṃ pati anicco saddo paccayādhīnavuttitoti, uttaraṃ na vattabbaṃ siddhasādhanabhāvato, evaṃ idhāpi daṭṭhabbaṃ. Siddhasādhanañhi daḍḍhassa ḍahanasadisattā niratthakameva siyā, aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana yasmā paravādinā yena sabhāvena yo dhammo atthi, teneva sabhāvena so vinā kālabhedādiparāmasanena natthīti patiṭṭhāpīyati, tasmā ‘‘ayoniso patiṭṭhāpitattā’’ti vuttaṃ.
本题释义谓:诸法或同质而异名,或非同质,故不能一概而论。如执诸法常住,谓言无常唯因缘所生,无常则言因缘而有,故不可言恒常。以坚固真理,如火烧故,真理不能废灭。论中示:以言不同而辩论不可止,亦有真义,故可依理解释。诸论证中,有时乃为异议而论,其意非成讼,亦非无义,实为立宗阐法。若以灭存分别,纠缠其义非实在。以此理当慧解。
Ettha ca ‘‘hevatthi, hevaṃ natthī’’ti paṭijānantena paravādinā yathā saparabhāvehi rūpādīnaṃ atthitā paṭiññātā, evaṃ kāladesādibhedehipi sā paṭiññātā eva. Tenevāha ‘‘atītaṃ anāgatapaccuppannavasena, anāgatapaccuppannāni vā atītādivasena natthī’’ti. Evaṃ sati nigaṇṭhācelakavādo paridīpito siyā. Te hi ‘‘siyā atthi, siyā natthi, siyā atthi ca natthi cā’’tiādinā sabbapadatthesu pattabhāge paṭijānanti. Tattha yadi vatthuno sabhāveneva, desakālasantānavasena vā natthitā adhippetā, taṃ siddhasādhanaṃ sakavādinopi icchitattā. Yassa hi dhammassa yo sabhāvo, na so tato aññathā upalabbhati. Yadi upalabbheyya, añño eva so siyā. Na cettha sāmaññalakkhaṇaṃ nidassetabbaṃ salakkhaṇassa adhippetattā tassa natthibhāvassa abhāvato. Yathā ca parabhāvena natthitāya na vivādo, evaṃ desakālantaresupi ittarakālattā saṅkhārānaṃ. Na hi saṅkhārā desantaraṃ, kālantaraṃ vā saṅkamanti khaṇikabhāvato. Eteneva pariyāyantarena natthitāpi paṭikkhittā veditabbā. Yathā ca atthitā, natthitā vinā kālabhedena ekasmiṃ dhamme patiṭṭhaṃ na labhanti aññamaññaviruddhattā, evaṃ sabbadāpi niccattā.
此外,异议者虽言无而有,无而无等,皆为诠释诸法时之现象区别。过去、未来、现在不同,亦是义种丰富多样表相。此说甚广,如吠舍族移转各义,应了解义体本质。法若真相不变,则不应因时相变,若变即非恒常。对此变化应明察,见诸法本质无过失。
Yaṃ pana te vadanti ‘‘yathā suvaṇṇaṃ kaṭakādirūpena ṭhitaṃ rucakādibhāvaṃ āpajjatīti niccāniccaṃ. Tañhi suvaṇṇabhāvāvijahanato niccaṃ kaṭakādibhāvahānito aniccaṃ, evaṃ sabbadhammā’’ti. Te idaṃ vattabbā ‘‘kiṃ kaṭakabhāvo kaṭakassa, udāhu suvaṇṇassā’’ti. Yadi kaṭakassa, suvaṇṇanirapekkho siyā tadaññabhāvo viya. Atha suvaṇṇassa, niccakālaṃ tattha upalabbheyya suvaṇṇabhāvo viya. Na ca sakkā ubhinnaṃ ekabhāvoti vattuṃ kaṭakavināsepi suvaṇṇāvināsato. Atha mataṃ, suvaṇṇakaṭakādīnaṃ pariyāyīpariyāyabhāvato nāyaṃ dosoti. Yathā hi kaṭakapariyāyanirodhena rucakapariyāyuppādepi pariyāyī tatheva tiṭṭhati, evaṃ manussapariyāyanirodhe devapariyāyuppādepi pariyāyī jīvadrabyaṃ tiṭṭhatīti niccāniccaṃ, tathā sabbadrabyānīti. Tayidaṃ ambaṃ puṭṭhassa labujabyākaraṇaṃ. Yaṃ sveva nicco aniccoti vā vadanto aññattha niccataṃ aññattha aniccataṃ paṭijānāti, atha pariyāyapariyāyīnaṃ anaññatā icchitā, evaṃ sati pariyāyopi nicco siyā pariyāyino anaññattā pariyāyasarūpaṃ viya, pariyāyī vā anicco pariyāyato anaññattā pariyāyasarūpaṃ viyāti. Atha nesaṃ aññā anaññatā, evañca sati vuttadosadvayānativatti. Apica koyaṃ pariyāyo nāma, yadi saṇṭhānaṃ, suvaṇṇo tāva hotu, kathaṃ jīvadrabye arūpibhāvato. Yadi tassapi saṇṭhānavantaṃ icchitaṃ, tathā satissa ekasmimpi sattasantāne bahutā āpajjati sarūpatā ca saṇṭhānavantesupi pīḷakādīsu tathādassanato. Atha pavattiviseso, evampi bahutā khaṇikatā ca āpajjati, tasmā pariyāyasarūpameva tāva patiṭṭhapetabbaṃ.
又谓譬如金铠,若以金性不灭论金,则铠必不坏;若以铠毁论金,则金当坏灭。此乃缘起变化之理,非应讼之弊。是以若以任一侧而论全体,皆属偏颇。人间世界,神界万物,皆如是因缘所生之变化。其为自然常住或无常,视缘而异。于本质不应执一相,而当知众相转变乃自然之理。就此理明智持常,堪称全面体认诸法现象。
Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ ‘‘suvaṇṇaṃ kaṭakādirūpena ṭhita’’nti, tattha sampattiyogato viññāyamānesu visiṭṭhesu rūpagandharasaphoṭṭhabbesu kiṃ ekaṃ, udāhu tesaṃ samudāyo, tabbinimuttaṃ vā dhammantaraṃ suvaṇṇanti? Tattha na tāva rūpādīsu ekekaṃ suvaṇṇaṃ tena suvaṇṇakiccāsiddhito, nāpi tabbinimuttaṃ dhammantaraṃ tādisassa abhāvato. Atha samudāyo, taṃ pana paññattimattanti na tassa niccatā, nāpi aniccatā sambhavati. Yathā ca suvaṇṇassa, evaṃ kaṭakassapi paññattimattattāti. Tayidaṃ nidassanaṃ paravādino jīvadrabyassapi paññattimattaṃ tasseva sādhetīti kuto tassa niccāniccatāti alamatippapañcena.
关于所说的“黄金是以金属形式存在”的说法,此处指的是在具备相应条件、能被辨识的众多特征中作为特殊者的金的属性。如其集成现象,或其纯净无杂的变化,则称为黄金?此中并无在各种色现象中各有一个黄金,因此不存在黄金通过具足某种功能而成;也无因无杂而变化成黄金。集成现象乃是相对约定,并非其恒常性,亦非无常所生。正如黄金如此,夹竹桃花的形态也是约定而已。对此例证,说明诸外道所执的命为生命财物之约定,仍须成立,故其恒常与无常之分只是一种细微的区别和标记罢了。
Hevatthikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 『确实存在』论注释结束。
Mahāvaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 大品注释结束。
2. Dutiyavaggo二、第二品
1. Parūpahāravaṇṇanā一、他者所诱论注释
§307
307.Vikkhambhitarāgāva avikkhambhitarāgānaṃ adhimānikatāya asambhavatoti yāva adhimānikaṃ, tāva sampajānā niddaṃ okkamantīti adhippāyo. ‘‘Adhimānikāna’’nti idaṃ bhūtapubbagatiyā vuttanti āha ‘‘adhimānikapubbā adhippetā siyu’’nti.
307.关于有变无变贪者与无变有变贪者之主宰状态的持有观:主宰是指至该主宰为止,能明了安住的状态,称为主宰。所谓“主宰者”,这是因过去世间的布施行为所致,即前面所称的“主宰之前即已被主宰”。
§308
308. Yaṃ vimatigāhakāraṇaṃ vuccamānaṃ, taṃ ‘‘handa hī’’ti paraṃ jotetīti adhippāyenāha ‘‘kāraṇattheti yutta’’nti. Vimatigāhassa pana nicchitataṃ ‘‘handa hī’’ti paraṃ jotetīti vuttaṃ ‘‘vacasāyatthe’’ti.
308.谓为断除见解的原因,称为“唉,止息吧”,这是作为主宰的语语。对于断除见解的确定,谓之“唉,止息吧”,表示言辞得到了倚靠。
Parūpahāravaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 击打他人之解释已毕。
5. Vacībhedakathāvaṇṇanā五、语破之论解释
§326
326.Soti paṭhamamaggaṭṭho. Tasmāti yasmā ‘‘virajaṃ vītamalaṃ dhammacakkhuṃ udapādi ‘yaṃ kiñci samudayadhammaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ nirodhadhamma’’’nti suttassa atthaṃ aññathā gahetvā udayabbayānupassanānissandena maggakkhaṇepi dukkhanti vipassanā upaṭṭhāti, tasmā ‘‘so dukkhamicceva vācaṃ bhāsatī’’ti vadanti.
326.正曰序章第一。是故,因为“生起清净无垢的法轮眼,见到一切所生皆为集起法,诸法皆为灭法”的经义,若取其别解而以观观察生起与灭除,禅定及智慧之道皆苦,因此谓之“苦之语亦如是言”。
§328
328.Icchiteti paravādinā sampaṭicchite. Āropiteti yuttiniddhāraṇena tasmiṃ atthe patiṭṭhāpite yujjati, vacīsamuṭṭhāpanakkhaṇato pana pacchā taṃ saddaṃ suṇātīti icchite na yujjati sotaviññāṇassa paccuppannārammaṇattāti adhippāyo. Yasmā pana attanā nicchāritaṃ saddaṃ attanāpi suṇāti, tasmā sotaviññāṇaṃ ‘‘yena taṃ saddaṃ suṇātī’’ti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
328.“起意”为外道称谓的充足。从理义确立,“加在其上”是合理的,因语言发出之时刚刚听闻该声音,故谓之有意不合理,因缘是声闻识的现起现见。且自己决定的声音,自己也听得见,所以注疏说:“声闻识乃是‘以其听得该声音而有’”当知。
§332
332.Lokuttaramaggakkhaṇeti paṭhamajjhānikassa paṭhamamaggassa khaṇe. Abhibhūsuttāharaṇe adhippāyo vattabboti etena tadāharaṇassa asambandhataṃ dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘tasmā asādhaka’’nti.
332.所谓出世间道处,指初禅时期第一道时门。主宰于了义的引受为执持之义。此处指出该引受并无联系。故称“因此是未证悟者”。
Vacībhedakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 语破之论解释已毕。
7. Cittaṭṭhitikathāvaṇṇanā七、心住之论解释
§335
335.Evanti ‘‘ekacittaṃ yāvatāyukaṃ tiṭṭhatī’’ti vuttākārena. Aññatthāti arūpabhavato aññasmiṃ. Etenāti ‘‘ekameva cittaṃ āruppe tiṭṭhati , yāvatāyukaṃ tiṭṭhatī’’ti evaṃvādinā dutiyāpi aḍḍhakathā passitabbā paṭhamakathāya cirakālāvaṭṭhānavacanassa aññadatthu bhāvavibhāvanatoti adhippāyo. Purimāyāti ‘‘yāvatāyukaṃ tiṭṭhatī’’ti pañhato purimāya. Tattha hi ‘‘vassasataṃ tiṭṭhatī’’ti pucchāya ‘‘āmantā’’ti anuññā katā, pacchimāyaṃ pana ‘‘manussānaṃ ekaṃ cittaṃ yāvatāyukaṃ tiṭṭhatī’’ti ‘‘na hevaṃ vattabbe’’ti paṭikkhepo kato. Avirodho vibhāvetabbo, yato tattheva anuññā katā, na pacchāti adhippāyo . Vassasatādīti ca ādi-saddena na kevalaṃ ‘‘dve vassasatānī’’ti evamādiyeva saṅgahitaṃ, atha kho ‘‘ekaṃ cittaṃ divasaṃ tiṭṭhatī’’ti evamādipīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Muhuttaṃ muhuttaṃ uppajjatīti pañho sakavādinā pucchito viya vutto’’ti idaṃ vicāretabbaṃ. ‘‘Muhuttaṃ muhuttaṃ uppajjatī’’ti pañho paravādissa. ‘‘Uppādavayadhammino’’tiādisuttatthavasena paṭiññā sakavādissāti hi vuttaṃ.
335.『如是,“至于恒常一心独存”』之言,乃以此说法而成。异义者谓无色法中别有其义。所谓“此即是一心独处无色,恒常存在”,依此言说者,于第二释义亦应观察:此义谓“一心仅在无色法中恒存”,第二释乃对初释长期流传之语的别义阐发,是为结论。所谓“早者恒存”,即问题之先说。由于“存百年”之问为先,且所谓“告知”未被承认,后则以“非唯有人之一心久存”为驳斥。此处之不同并无矛盾,盖因先者被告知,后者不被采纳,故为结论。“存百年”中“存”之初词,不仅限于“二百年”等聚合表达,而应见“心一日恒存”等起始语,故应明白。另“时刻不断生起”问题如同轻说者所问,宜细思之。“时刻不断生起”是轻说者之问,“生灭无常”等经义应是以往轻说者之答复语。」
Cittaṭṭhitikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 心住之论解释已毕。
9. Anupubbābhisamayakathāvaṇṇanā九、次第现观之论解释
§339
339. ‘‘Tāni vā cattāripi ñāṇāni eko sotāpattimaggoyevāti paṭijānātī’’ti imaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘atha vā’’tiādi. Catunnaṃ ñāṇānanti dukkheñāṇādīnaṃ catunnaṃ ñāṇānaṃ. Ekamaggabhāvatoti sotāpattiādiekamaggabhāvato. Kamena pavattamānānipi hi tāni ñāṇāni taṃtaṃmaggakiccassa sādhanato ekoyeva maggo hotīti adhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘ekamaggassa…pe… paṭijānātī’’ti.
339.「『这些四种智慧之一者,乃单一路向初果』」是说此意之因。四种智慧者,即苦智等四种智慧。『单一路向』谓订有初果转入,如初果入道般。虽于四种智慧中此即唯一路向,盖因正行中能转依此智慧实行故,故为结论。基由是故说『唯一路向教法……能了知』。」
§344
344.Dassaneti maggadassane.
344.『示现』者,示现道也。
§345
345. Dhammatthānaṃ hetuphalabhāvato dhammatthapaṭisambhidānaṃ siyā sotāpattiphalahetutā, tadabhāvato na itarapaṭisambhidānanti āha ‘‘nirutti…pe… vicāretabba’’nti. Sabbāsampi pana paṭisambhidānaṃ paṭhamaphalasacchikiriyāhetutā vicāretabbā maggādhigameneva laddhabbattā phalānaṃ viya, tasmā ‘‘aṭṭhahi ñāṇehī’’ti ettha nikkhepakaṇḍe āgatanayena dukkhādiñāṇānaṃ pubbantādiñāṇānañca vasena ‘‘aṭṭhahi ñāṇehī’’ti yuttaṃ viya dissati.
345.由于法义包含因果理,故法义辨别成为初果道果之因;若无此则无其他辨别者,故言『言说当思此理』。整体来说,辨别为初果成就之初因,其他道果成就后应亦然辨别,于此故言“八智慧”为前行苦等智慧之前映,如此显出现前。
Anupubbābhisamayakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 《次第现观论注释》终了。
10. Vohārakathāvaṇṇanā10. 《世俗言说论注释》
§347
347.Visayavisayīsūti rūpacakkhādike sandhāyāha. Te hi rūpakkhandhapariyāpannattā ekantena lokiyā. Visayassevāti saddasseva. So hi voharitabbato vohārakaraṇatāya ca ‘‘vohāro’’ti pāḷiyaṃ vutto. Natthettha kāraṇaṃ visayīnaṃ visayassapi āsavādianārammaṇatābhāvato. Asiddhalokuttarabhāvassa ekantasāsavattā tassa saddāyatanassa yathā lokuttaratā tava matenāti adhippāyo.
347.「境与境所」是指色眼等境界。因境随色蕴等成,故此境专指世间法。境所有义,唯表境之存在。『境』为行为所缘,此乃巴利语之本义。此中非指坏境,因无烦恼毒性。因坏境为出世间境,世间境对应为此,此见为结论。
Paṭihaññeyyāti idaṃ parikappavacanaṃ. Parikappavacanañca ayāthāvanti āha ‘‘na hi…pe… atthī’’ti. Na hi jalaṃ analanti parikappitaṃ dahati pacati vā. Kiṃ lokiyena ñāṇena jānitabbato lokiyo rūpāyatanādi viya, udāhu lokuttaro paccavekkhiyamānamaggādi viyāti evamettha hetussa anekantabhāvo veditabbo. Tenāha ‘‘lokiye lokuttare ca sambhavato’’ti.
「应反思」此为说明语。说明意谓“水本不燃,所说为错误”。以世俗智慧而言,诸法如色界等,应被知为世间法。譬若以出世间法观现世法,如道路之远近,此处因缘多面,故应察察之。故言“于世间及出世间皆有成就”。
Vohārakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 《世俗言说论注释》终了。
11. Nirodhakathāvaṇṇanā11. 《灭论注释》
§353
353.Yesaṃ dvinnanti yesaṃ dvinnaṃ dukkhasaccānaṃ. Dvīhi nirodhehīti appaṭisaṅkhāpaṭisaṅkhāsaṅkhātehi dvīhi nirodhehi. Tattha dukkhādīnaṃ paṭisaṅkhāti paṭisaṅkhā, paññāviseso. Tena vattabbo nirodho paṭisaṅkhānirodho. Yo sāsavehi dhammehi visaṃyogoti vuccati, yo paccayavekallena dhammānaṃ uppādassa accantavibandhabhūto nirodho, so paṭisaṅkhāya navattabbato appaṭisaṅkhānirodho nāmāti paravādino laddhi. Paṭisaṅkhāya vinā niruddhāti paccayavekallena anuppattiṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘na uppajjitvā bhaṅgā’’ti. Anuppādopi hi nirodhoti vuccati yato ‘‘imassuppādā idaṃ uppajjatī’’ti lakkhaṇuddesassa paṭilome ‘‘imassa nirodhā idaṃ nirujjhatī’’ti dassito. Tenāti paṭisaṅkhāya nirodhassa khaṇikanirodhassa ca idha nādhippetattā.
353.关于二种缘起,及二种苦谛的问题。所谓二种熄灭,是指以简约而相互对应的二种熄灭。此中对苦及诸法的对应称为对治,乃智慧的别差别。由此必须知晓的熄灭,名为对治熄灭。所谓离诸烦恼法为断者,谓断除侵染法,或因缘分离、自在断灭诸法的生起者,此即对治,而非对治熄灭者,乃妄执人所获。无对治因缘,则为依缘不生而断,此断即为不生。故此有言:“不生即破坏。”不生亦谓熄灭,因其“此生起故,此则灭”,意涵相反而表现熄灭。由此,对于对治熄灭及刹那熄灭,皆非随意捏造。
Nirodhakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 《灭论注释》终了。
Dutiyavaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 第二品注释终了。
3. Tatiyavaggo三、第三品
1. Balakathāvaṇṇanā一、力论注释
§354
354.Niddesatoti ‘‘aṭṭhānametaṃ anavakāso’’tiādinā niddiṭṭhappakārato. So pana yasmā vitthāro hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘vitthārato’’ti. Sabbaṃ kilesāvaraṇādiṃ, tameva paccekaṃ pavattiākārabhedato sabbākāraṃ. ‘‘Sabba’’nti hi idaṃ sarūpato gahaṇaṃ, ‘‘sabbākārato’’ti pavattiākārabhedato. Bhagavā hi dhamme jānanto tesaṃ ākārabhede anavasesetvāva jānāti. Yathāha ‘‘sabbe dhammā sabbākārato buddhassa bhagavato ñāṇamukhe āpāthaṃ āgacchantī’’ti (mahāni. 156; cūḷani. mogharājamāṇavapucchāniddesa 85; paṭi. ma. 3.5). Uddesatoti ekadesato. Ekadeso ca vitthāro na hotīti āha ‘‘saṅkhepato’’ti. Yathā jānantīti sambandho. Uddesamattenapīti diṭṭhigatayathābhūtañāṇādippabhedānaṃ āsayādīnaṃ uddesamattenapi. Tenāha ‘‘indriyānaṃ tikkhamudubhāvajānanamattaṃ sandhāyā’’ti. Therenāti anuruddhattherena. Evamevāti uddesato ṭhānādimattajānanākāreneva. Svāyamattho sakavādināpi icchitoyevāti āha ‘‘kathamayaṃ codetabbo siyā’’ti.
354.关于指示的理解,是从“此处无隙可入”等语句的明确指示方式而言。然因其内容广大,故称为“展开”。诸烦恼蔽障等法,分别依其不同发生相别而展开。所谓“诸法”,是指形态各异、难以洞悉之法;“诸法展开”,则依不同发生的分别。世尊了知诸法之差别,无所遗漏。如语“诸法诸相皆从佛陀智门而入”。指示者谓其为单一之点。单一点不等于展开,故称为“摘要”。例如认识时,谓其为条件的联系。指示之主体,更包括了执见根本误解等各种知识种类。于是云:“乃因观察根利敏锐,知悉三根智慧”。长老是指阿奴罗陀长老。如此而已,关于指示,乃由场所等缘起认识之故。即使是说谎者,若愿意,亦当如此解答,故曰“应如何发问”。
§356
356.Sesesūti indriyaparopariyattañāṇato sesesu. Paṭikkhepoti asādhāraṇatāpaṭikkhepo. Nanu ca sesānaṃ asādhāraṇatāpi atthīti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘ṭhānā…pe… adhippāyo’’ti.
356.“余余”二字从对彼处所及他处所的认识说起。所谓“反对”,是谓非通常意义上的反对。然亦意在激励,故说“处所……更为适当”。
Balakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 力论注释完毕。
2. Ariyantikathāvaṇṇanā二、「圣」论注释
§357
357.Saṅkhāresandhāya paṭijānantassāti diṭṭhiyā parikappitena sattena suññe saṅkhāre sandhāya ‘‘suññatañca manasi karotī’’ti pucchāya ‘‘āmantā’’ti paṭijānantassa. Dvinnaṃ phassānaṃ samodhānaṃ kathaṃ āpajjati ṭhānāṭhānabhūte saṅkhāre vuttanayena suññataṃ manasi karontassāti adhippāyo. Yathāvuttanayenāti ‘‘diṭṭhiyā parikappitena sattena suññā pañcakkhandhā’’ti pakārena nayena. Atha vā yathāvuttanayenāti ‘‘ṭhānāṭhānamanasikāro saṅkhārārammaṇo, suññatāmanasikāro nibbānārammaṇo’’ti evaṃ vuttanayena. ‘‘Saṅkhāre sandhāya paṭijānantassā’’ti vuttattā ‘‘dvinnaṃ phassānaṃ samodhānaṃ kathaṃ āpajjatī’’ti āha. Sattasuññatāya suññattepi saṅkhārānaṃ aññova ṭhānāṭhānamanasikāro, añño suññatāmanasikāroti yujjateva dvinnaṃ phassānaṃ samodhānāpatticodanā, saṅkhāre sandhāya paṭijānantassa pana kathaṃ ariyabhāvasiddhi ṭhānāṭhānañāṇādīnanti vicāretabbaṃ. Kiṃ vā etāya yutticintāya. Ummattakapacchisadiso hi paravādivādo. Aññesupi ṭhānesu īdisesu eseva nayo. Āropetvāti itthipurisādiākāraṃ, sattākārameva vā asantaṃ rūpādiupādāne āropetvā. Abhūtāropanañhettha paṇidahananti adhippetaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘parikappanavasenā’’ti. Soti yathāvutto paṇidhi. Ekasmimpi khandhe.
357.从造作的缘起而知断除之理,以见所构意相中空性之理,问曰:“二触的和合如何产生?”这是基于处处存在的造作,被指示以空性意念。其理在于以执见界定之存在为五蕴空性,或者以处处专注于造作状态,空性专注于涅槃状态,二者对比而说。说“由缘起之造作知见”,问“二触和合如何生?”即含指五蕴空性以见执见界限之意。由此探讨圣果成就、处处知见等事。为何如此思维?因狂人异端之辩论。其他场合亦同此类说法。所谓“加托”,指男女种类外形等借假设,七种或以上外表及非纯色、他色缘起附加假定,“假设”之义在此指强加、附着。故曰“假设性”。如同文中所示“一处于蕴中”。
Ariyantikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 「圣」论注释完毕。
4. Vimuccamānakathāvaṇṇanā四、正被解脱者论注释
§366
366. Maggakkhaṇe cittaṃ ekadesena vimuttaṃ ekadesena avimuttanti ayaṃ ‘‘vimuttaṃ vimuccamāna’’nti laddhiyā doso. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘ekadesaṃ vimuttaṃ, ekadesaṃ avimutta’’nti. Aṭṭhakathāyañca ‘‘tañhi tadā samucchedavimuttiyā vimuttekadesena vimuccamānantissa laddhī’’ti dassitovāyamattho. Vippakataniddeseti vimuccanakiriyāya apariyositatāniddese. Yaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘vimuttaṃ vimuccamānanti vippakatabhāvena vuttattā’’ti. Tenāti paravādinā. Vimucca…pe… vuttaṃ vimuccamānassa vimuttabhāvābhāvato, vimuttabhedena pana tathā vuttanti adhippāyo. Sati ca dose vippakataniddeseti ānetvā yojetabbaṃ. Ekadeso visesanaṃ hoti nippadesavimuttiyā avicchinnato. Phalacittenāti paṭhamaphalacittena uppannena.
366.于道理时,心一则为解脱,一则为未解脱,此为“解脱中有执着”的见解。因经典语云“一则解脱,一则未解脱”。注疏中说:“为此,在那时,称为断绝解脱者,意即为殊胜解脱之说”。所谓“起反例指示”,是说明解脱性质不完全时用语。因其语是“解脱者及解脱中的分别说”,为辩论所用。此中之解脱者与非解脱者论别,乃为辨正。若加正念,则为反例指示,应当引入加持。释义中“一则为特征,是可断绝解脱,为不断续者”。所谓“果心”,指初果法所发心。
Vimuccamānakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 关于正在解脱者之论的注释终了。
5. Aṭṭhamakakathāvaṇṇanā五、第八者论注释
§368
368.Pahīnānāma bhaveyyuṃ, na pahiyyamānāti adhippāyo.
368.“已放弃者当有,非放弃者则非”,此为辩论立场。
Aṭṭhamakakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 第八者论注释终了。
6. Aṭṭhamakassa indriyakathāvaṇṇanā六、第八者之根论注释
§371
371. Lokuttarānaṃyeva saddhādīnaṃ indriyabhāvo, na lokiyānanti paravādino adhippāyavasenāha ‘‘appaṭiladdhindriyattā’’tiādi. Tattha niyyānikāni bhāventoti yathā niyyānikā honti, evaṃ uppādento brūhento vā. Indriyabhāvaṃ pana pattesu tesu puna bhāvanākiccaṃ natthīti tassa adhippāyoti dassento āha ‘‘na pana indriyāni bhāvento’’ti.
371. 关于超世间的信仰等感官状态,断非世俗的人所言,仅凭外在权势说其为“感官功能不全”等。人所修习的出离法门感官状态,如同出离法时的状态,出现时、增长时皆是如此。但当感官状态起用时,便无须继续修习感官状态,故称“并非感官在修习中”。
Aṭṭhamakassa indriyakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 第八者之根论注释终了。
7. Dibbacakkhukathāvaṇṇanā七、天眼论注释
§373
373. Visinoti visesena bandhati visayīnaṃ attapaṭibandhaṃ karotīti visayo, ārammaṇaṃ , anubhavati etenāti ānubhāvo, sāmatthiyaṃ, balanti attho, gocarakaraṇaṃ gocaro, visaye ānubhāvagocarā visaya…pe… carāti. Tehi yathā visiṭṭhaṃ visesaṃ hoti, tathā paccayabhūtena jhānadhammena āhitabalaṃ katabalādhānaṃ. Visayaggahaṇañcettha ānubhāvagocarakaraṇānaṃ pavattiṭṭhānadassanaṃ yatthassa tehi upatthaddhattā balādhānaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti. Tenāha ‘‘yādise visaye’’tiādi. Balādhānañca uttarimanussadhammato mahaggatadhammavisesato uppannehi paṇītehi cittajarūpehi visesāpatti. Yaṃ nissāya parāvuttīti eke vadanti. Purimaṃ maṃsacakkhumattamevāti yathāvuttabalādhānato purimaṃ maṃsacakkhumattameva. Vadanto saṅgahakāro. Visayaggahaṇaṃ pāḷiyaṃ kataṃ. Na visayavisesadassanatthanti na visayassa visesadassanatthaṃ. Yato ubhinnampi rūpāyatanameva visayoti visayassa sadisataṃ avisesaṃ āha, sadisassa vā visesaṃ dīpetīti yojanā.
373. 「分别」指区别明显地连结对象,使其产生对应心之作用。「对象」即所缘,感受与经验所在,称为「相续经验」。而「力量」与「功能」指其能耐,类似行动场所称为「境」,对应的感受状态称为「所缘」,依此相续经验,行进。正如分别即特殊,依缘而生的禅定法门加持所产生的力量也同样明显。此处「对象承受」或「相续经验境界」的发生与稳住,因附加了力量而明显。故云「如在某境」。这种力量与功能,是超越人间法的尊胜法门的特质,诸高调净的识受所成就的特殊性。有学者因缘说依托之故谓为「他起」。例如前面所言肉眼最胜,则以力量加持来说即为肉眼最胜。说者为集释者。 「对象承受」为巴利用语,并非指对象的特殊之见,亦非指对对象的特殊之见。因二者同为色眼识所缘,故用比较与加注的方式加以区分。
Dhammupatthaddha…pe… adhippāyo, aññathā laddhiyeva na siyāti bhāvo. Maggoti upāyo, kāraṇanti attho. Pakaticakkhumato eva hi dibbacakkhu uppajjati. Kasmā? Kasiṇālokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā dibbacakkhuñāṇassa uppādanaṃ, so ca kasiṇamaṇḍale uggahanimittena vinā natthi, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘maṃsacakkhupaccayatādassanatthameva vutta’’nti. Tenāti ‘‘maggo’’ti vacanena. Rūpāvacarajjhānapaccayenāti rūpāvacarajjhānena paccayabhūtena uppannāni rūpāvacarajjhānacittasamuṭṭhitāni. Jhānakammasamuṭṭhitesu vattabbameva natthi. Tassa hesā laddhi.
「以法相为依者」等权势,若以他法依止则不成立。路径即方法,意即因缘。天眼的生起唯由光明遍照诸界,故称「光明轮」。因为何故?因增长光明盘,产生天眼智慧,若无光明盘中之觉照,无缘不可得。故说“仅为肉眼缘起表象”。这是所谓「路径」,以色界观禅定为依因,因而产生由禅定功夫聚合的色界观定现前。此禅定功夫集聚之识不适宜其他用途,是其特征。此即所成就的功能,称为「所得」。
§374
374.Yena dibbacakkhuno paññācakkhubhāvassa icchanena paṭijānanena. Tīṇi cakkhūni maṃsadibbapaññācakkhūni cakkhuntarabhāvaṃ vadato bhaveyyuṃ, tasmā taṃ na icchatīti attho.
374. 由天眼明相智慧之愿望产生。三眼即肉眼、天眼、法眼,谓三种不同的眼识状态。故不谓其不愿求此慧。
Dibbacakkhukathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 天眼论注释结束。
9. Yathākammūpagatañāṇakathāvaṇṇanā九、随业所趣智论注释
§377
377. Dibbacakkhupādakattā ‘‘yathākammūpagatañāṇassa upanissaye dibbacakkhumhī’’ti vuttaṃ, na yathākammūpagatajānanakiccake dibbacakkhumhi tassa taṃkiccakatābhāvato. Yato yaṃ anaññaṃ, tampi tato anaññamevāti āha ‘‘iminā…pe… bhavitabba’’nti. Tattha atthantarabhāvaṃ nivāretīti dibbacakkhuñāṇassa pakkhikattā yathākammūpagatañāṇassa tato atthantarabhāvaṃ nivāreti. Tassa hi taṃ paribhaṇḍañāṇaṃ. Dibbacakkhussa yathākammūpagatañāṇato atthantarabhāvaṃ na nivāreti atappakkhikattāti adhippāyo. Dibbacakkhussa yathākammūpagatañāṇakiccatā paravādinā icchitā, na yathākammūpagatañāṇassa dibbacakkhukiccatāti tamatthaṃ ‘‘yathākammūpagatañāṇameva dibbacakkhu’’nti ettha yojetvā dassento ‘‘eva-saddo cā’’tiādimāha.
377. 关于天眼产生,云“依据如实因缘相应之智慧而生”,非指因相应之知识作用故而得天眼。因一切的相互依存,乃至于止息,乃名“如是生”。说“依此……应生”。此处阐明天眼智慧的本质是依因缘无间断的相续,防止因果脱节。故言其为“藏识”,不能因为天眼之智慧而断除相续。此其特点即权势。因天眼之智慧非因悟入法亦非他人所拥有的智慧所成就,故云“诸权势”。欲心、他说之辩不及此。故以“唯是依因智慧即是天眼”表示其实。
Yathākammūpagatañāṇakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 随业所趣智论注释结束。
10. Saṃvarakathāvaṇṇanā十、防护论注释
§379
379.Āṭānāṭiyasutte ‘‘santi, bhikkhave, yakkhā yebhuyyena pāṇātipātā appaṭiviratā’’ti (dī. ni. 3.276, 286) āgatattā cātumahārājikānaṃ saṃvarāsaṃvarasabbhāvo avivādasiddho. Yattha pana vivādo, tameva dassentena tāvatiṃsādayo gahitāti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘cātumahārājikāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ satīti yadi tāvatiṃsesu saṃvarāsaṃvaro natthi, evaṃ sante. Surāpānanti etthāpi ‘‘suyyatī’’ti padaṃ ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Kathaṃ suyyatīti? Vuttañhetaṃ kumbhajātake –
379. 《掉舌经》中说:“比库们,业力强大的亚卡,虽未断杀生,却不会随意妄伤”(增支部尼连禅那经,3.276,286)来临四大天王之地,彼处守律众不生争闹争执。若有争执产生,即由诸天护法介入制止。因此称为“四大天王地”故名。如此说,若诸天无约束众生之力,无争也无所谓平和。关于斗酒之言,文中亦取“尽欢饮”之义以资对照,此处「尽饮」应当联系相关用法论述。如何理解“尽饮”?《茄子本生经》有记载——
‘‘Yaṃ ve pivitvā pubbadevā pamattā,
「过去诸天饮酒之后,
Tidivā cutā sassatiyā samāyā;
天界死亡,寿命终止;
Taṃ tādisaṃ majjamimaṃ niratthaṃ,
如此沉沦于无益之中,
Jānaṃ mahārāja kathaṃ piveyyā’’ti. (jā. 1.16.58);
大王啊,应如何饮用?」如是问。
Tattha pubbadevā nāma asurā. Te hi tāvatiṃsānaṃ uppattito pubbadevāti paññāyiṃsu. Pamattāti surāpānena pamādaṃ āpannā. Tidivāti manussacātumahārājikaloke upādāya tatiyalokabhūtā devaṭṭhānā, nāmameva vā etaṃ tassa devaṭṭhānassa. Sassatiyāti kevalaṃ dīghāyukataṃ sandhāya vadati. Samāyā saha attano asuramāyāya, asuramantehi saddhiṃ cutāti attho. Aṭṭhakathāyañca vuttaṃ ‘‘āgantukadevaputtā āgatāti nevāsikā gandhapānaṃ sajjayiṃsu. Sakko sakaparisāya saññamadāsī’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘tesaṃ surāpānaṃ asaṃvaro na hotīti vattabbaṃ hotī’’ti. Ettha ca tāvatiṃsānaṃ pātubhāvato paṭṭhāya surāpānampi tattha nāhosi, pageva pāṇātipātādayoti viramitabbābhāvato eva tāvatiṃsato paṭṭhāya upari devalokesu samādānasampattavirativasena puretabbā saṃvarā na santi, lokuttarā pana santiyeva. Tathā tehi pahātabbā asaṃvarā. Na hi appahīnānusayānaṃ maggavajjhā kilesā na santīti.
其中所谓过去诸天,是指阿修罗。他们被认为是初生于忉利天的过去诸天。所谓放逸者,即因饮酒而生的放逸。所谓三界,指人间四大王世界中第三界的天界,此为其天界名称。寿命终止,仅指寿命的终结。如来与阿修罗众同在一起时,则称为死去。注疏中说:「有外来天子子来访,非来自香气之乡。」萨咖与其部众表示不赞同饮酒行为,言:「他们饮酒无度,故应规劝。」此处因忉利天衰亡,故应避免酒食。但忉利天中亦无酒类,唯因戒杀等戒律减少,故忉利天修持戒律松懈,与世俗众生无异,无所谓清净。故应断除松懈,戒律虽减,仍须守持。正因为道不降,烦恼不灭,故如此。
Saṃvarakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 防护论注释结束。
Tatiyavaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 第三品注释结束。
4. Catutthavaggo第四品
1. Gihissa arahātikathāvaṇṇanā一、在家者阿拉汉论释
§387
387.Gihichandarāgasampayuttatāyāti gihibhāve kāmabhogibhāve chandarāgasahitatāya.
387.「与居家生活中爱欲贪念相应」者,谓居家者于享受爱欲时,俱有爱欲与贪念之合成。
Gihissa arahātikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 在家者阿拉汉论释已毕。
4. Samannāgatakathāvaṇṇanā四、具足论释
§393
393.Pattinti adhigamo. Adhigamo nāma samannāgamo hotīti pāḷiyaṃ catūhi phassādīhi samannāgamo coditoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
393. 得法者,即谓具足获得。巴利中所谓得法者,是指由四种触等所具足而成之得法,实应观察理解。
Samannāgatakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 具足论释已毕。
5. Upekkhāsamannāgatakathāvaṇṇanā五、具足舍论释
§397
397.Sabbaṃyojetabbanti ettha yadi te arahā catūhi khandhehi viya chahi upekkhāhi samannāgato, evaṃ sante cha upekkhā paccekaṃ phassādisahitāti ‘‘chahi phassādīhi samannāgato’’tiādinā yojetabbaṃ.
397. 应当调适一切,是指若阿拉汉于四蕴如六处上的六种无分别平等,则此时若存在此等六种无分别平等,即称为具足六触等,应当调适。
Upekkhāsamannāgatakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 具舍论之义注已毕。
6. Bodhiyābuddhotikathāvaṇṇanā6. 菩提树下成佛论之义注
§398
398.Pattidhammavasenāti ‘‘pattidhammo nāmā’’tiādinā vuttassa cittavippayuttassa saṅkhārassa vasena. ‘‘Bodhiyā buddho’’ti pucchā. ‘‘Bodhiyā niruddhāya vigatāya paṭippassaddhāya abuddho hotī’’ti anuyogo. Evamaññatthāpi pucchānuyogā veditabbā.
398. 依缘起之义者,此谓心所离散之行持的因缘。即于问“何为觉者”,回答为“为使觉悟终止、断除烦恼而得安静者即为不觉”,此后应知问答意涵。
Bodhiyābuddhotikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 菩提树下成佛论之义注已毕。
7. Lakkhaṇakathāvaṇṇanā7. 相论之义注
§402
402.Tasmāti yasmā abodhisattassapi cakkavattino lakkhaṇehi samannāgamo bodhisattassapi carimabhavato aññattha asamannāgamo hoti, tasmā lakkhaṇasamannāgato bodhisattovāti imassatthassa asādhakaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘ābhatampi anābhatasadisamevā’’ti.
402. 因为即使未成佛前的菩萨,也并非依赖世间天王所特有之标志,菩萨于成佛前亦非具某特征。故此菩萨非特定标志者,被视为本义不成立,故云“明亮者亦如未明亮者”。
Lakkhaṇakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 相论之义注已毕。
8. Niyāmokkantikathāvaṇṇanā8. 决定出离论之义注
§403
403.Pāramīpūraṇanti idaṃ bodhicariyāya upalakkhaṇaṃ, na pāramīnaṃ puṇṇabhāvadassanaṃ. Tena tesaṃ ārambhasamādānādīnampi saṅgaho katoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Mahābhinīhārato paṭṭhāya hi mahāsattā niyatāti vuccanti. Yathāha – ‘‘evaṃ sabbaṅgasampannā, bodhiyā niyatā narā’’ti, ‘‘dhuvaṃ buddho bhavissatī’’ti ca, na niyāmassa nāma kassaci dhammassa uppannattā byākaronti, atha kho ekaṃsenāyaṃ pāramiyo pūretvā buddho bhavissatīti katvā byākarontīti paravādīparikappitaṃ dhammantaraṃ paṭisedheti, na bodhiyā niyatattaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘kevalañhi na’’ntiādi.
403. 波罗蜜圆满,乃菩提行之特征,而非见证波罗蜜之满具。由此乃见开始与承续等也应归纳概摄。大勇猛者称为“大士必成”,如言“如此诸所具足者,诸人必成佛”,未有人以规则阐明,因此存在“若独自圆满此波罗蜜则能成佛”的反对见解,故云“非仅此一因”。
Niyāmokkantikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 决定出离论之解释已毕。
10. Sabbasaṃyojanappahānakathāvaṇṇanā10. 一切结之断论解释
§413
413. Satipi kesañci saṃyojanānaṃ heṭṭhimamaggehi pahīnatte ‘‘pañcannaṃ orambhāgiyānaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ parikkhayā’’tiādīsu viya vaṇṇabhaṇanamukhena anavasesatañca sandhāya sabbasaṃyojanappahānakittanaṃ pariyāyavacananti āha ‘‘imaṃ pariyāyaṃ aggahetvā’’ti. Arahattamaggena pajahanato evāti gaṇhātīti aggamaggo eva sabbasaṃyojanāni pajahatīti laddhiṃ gaṇhātīti vadanti padakārā. Evaṃ satīti yadi anavasesatāmattena tathā paṭijānāti.
413. 于五结之最下部结已断灭时,如“前五结断灭”等,乃说明断结情形时,因不同说法而成为对此断结之综述说辞,此谓“总称”。谓“以此总称取要”,依阿拉汉道断除诸结,故成此语义,使仪式之说者遂谓“断尽诸结”,此意谓言必定为断尽无余,故云“如是也”,若依此无余性而发心亦复如是。
Sabbasaṃyojanappahānakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 一切结之断论解释已毕。
Catutthavaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 第四品解释已毕。
5. Pañcamavaggo5. 第五品
1. Vimuttikathāvaṇṇanā1. 解脱论解释
§418
418. Phalañāṇaṃ na hoti, sesāni vipassanāmaggapaccavekkhaṇañāṇāni vimuttānīti na vattabbānīti sambandho. Etthāti etesu catūsu ñāṇesu. Vipassanāggahaṇena gahitaṃ maggādikiccavidūrakiccattā vipassanāpariyosānattā ca.
418. 果知不现行,余知则为观见诸内观之后续智,此智非说已解脱者所应。缘此,此四智中之。由内观法执持,因具业、道诸所知,至内观毕竟而成。
Vimuttikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 解脱论释毕。
2. Asekhañāṇakathāvaṇṇanā二、无学智论释
§421
421. Asekhe ārabbha pavattattā asekhañāṇanti parassa laddhi, na asekhe asekhadhamme pariyāpannanti imamatthamāha ‘‘etena…pe… dassetī’’ti.
421. 自未成就而起动,于未成就智者谓之得彼人智,不于未成就事中遍修,此义故云『由此……显之』。
Asekhañāṇakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 无学智论释毕。
3. Viparītakathāvaṇṇanā三、颠倒论释
§424
424. Asive sivāti vohāraṃ viya aññāṇe…pe… vadati.
424. “阿死维”谓如言语中所说,……
Viparītakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 颠倒论释毕。
4. Niyāmakathāvaṇṇanā四、决定论释
§428-431
428-431.Yanti yaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Saccānulomanti saccappaṭivedhānukūlaṃ. Viparītānuyogato pabhuti gaṇetvā ‘‘catuttha’’nti āha na aniyatassa niyāmagamanāyāti aviparītānuyogato pabhuti gaṇetvā, tathā sati pañcamabhāvato visesabhāvato ca.
428-431. 其往智者,如实正顺,随实分别之;反向增,数其量而名“第四”,非无规则之约束。由反向增数,及此正念所生第五特有之现象。
Niyāmakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 决定论之释毕。
5. Paṭisambhidākathāvaṇṇanā5. 无碍解论之释
§432-433
432-433.Sabbaṃñāṇanti idaṃ ‘‘ariyāna’’nti iminā na visesitanti adhippāyenāha ‘‘anariyānampi hi ñāṇaṃ ñāṇamevā’’ti. Atha vā pāḷiyaṃ avisesena sabbaṃ ñāṇanti vuttaṃ gahetvā evamāha. Ariyassa ce ñāṇanti, so pana paṭikkhepeyyāti āha ‘‘anariyassa etaṃ ñāṇaṃ sandhāyā’’ti.
432-433. 「一切智」谓此为「圣者」之智,谓之不特殊者。总称曰:「非圣者亦唯以智为智。」乃取巴利原文「一切智」不加分别,如是说。若谓圣者智,则于闇蔽中弃此智,谓之:「此为非圣者所集智。」
Paṭisambhidākathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 无碍解论之释毕。
7. Cittārammaṇakathāvaṇṇanā7. 心所缘论之释
§436-438
436-438.Vattabbapaṭiññāti phassārammaṇe ñāṇaṃ vattabbaṃ cetopariyañāṇanti evaṃ pavattā paṭiññā.
436-438. 应当知即为触境之智,及心上知者,根此而起,此即所谓知应当转动之义。
Cittārammaṇakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 心所缘论之释毕。
8. Anāgatañāṇakathāvaṇṇanā8. 未来智论之释
§439-440
439-440.Anantarānāgatepicitte ñāṇaṃ icchanti, tattha pana khaṇapaccuppanne viya tādisena parikammena kadāci ñāṇaṃ uppajjeyya. Tenāha ‘‘anantare ekanteneva ñāṇaṃ natthī’’ti.
439-440. 有即将到来的意念者欲得知见,但如同片刻显现的某种因缘,究竟有时会生起知见。因此说“于此立即当下并无独显的知见。”
Anāgatañāṇakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 未来智论注释结束。
9. Paṭuppannañāṇakathāvaṇṇanā九、现在智论注释
§441-442
441-442. ‘‘Sabbasaṅkhāresu aniccato diṭṭhesū’’ti vutte yaṃ dassanabhūtaṃ ñāṇaṃ, tampi saṅkhārasabhāvattā tathādiṭṭhaṃ siyāti atthato āpajjati, evaṃbhūtaṃ vacanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘atthato āpannaṃ vacana’’nti. Taṃ pana yasmā ‘‘tampi ñāṇaṃ aniccato diṭṭhaṃ hotī’’ti paṭijānanavasena pavattaṃ, tasmā ‘‘anujānanavacana’’nti vuttaṃ. Bhaṅgānupassanānaṃ pabandhavasena pavattamānānaṃ.
441-442. 『诸行无常之理在所见境界』如是说的观知,乃是基于诸行本体而真实所见的知见,理义上成立。因此对该句辞用“理义成立的言辞”加以说明。因该知见是以『所见知见为无常』的明显肯定而呈现,所以称之为“肯定言辞”。此为断观诸行破灭的条件与根本所在。
Paṭuppannañāṇakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 现在智论注释结束。
10. Phalañāṇakathāvaṇṇanā十、果智论注释
§443-444
443-444.Phalaparopariyattaṃ phalassa uccāvacatā. Balenāti ñāṇabalena.
443-444. 果报之际彼此相续迁转,谓果报因力量者为知见之力。
Phalañāṇakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 果智论注释结束。
Pañcamavaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 第五品注释结束。
Mahāpaṇṇāsako samatto. · 大五十已完。
6. Chaṭṭhavaggo6. 第六品
1. Niyāmakathāvaṇṇanā1. 决定论释
§445-447
445-447.Etassa ariyassa puggalassa.
445-447.『此圣者补特伽罗』者。
Niyāmakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 决定论释已毕。
2. Paṭiccasamuppādakathāvaṇṇanā2. 缘起论释
§451
451.Kāraṇaṭṭhena ṭhitatāti kāraṇabhāvena byabhicaraṇābhāvamāha. Yo hi dhammo yassa dhammassa yadā kāraṇaṃ hoti, na tassa tadā aññathābhāvo atthi, sā ca atthato kāraṇabhāvoyevāti ‘‘kāraṇabhāvoyevā’’ti āha.
451. 所谓由原因所立,指非违背其因缘义理。若法为某法所因,则此不可无他依,此即真实因缘义理之意,故称“确为因缘义理”。
Paṭiccasamuppādakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 缘起论释已毕。
5. Nirodhasamāpattikathāvaṇṇanā5. 灭尽定论释
§457-459
457-459.Sabhāvadhammataṃ paṭisedheti tadubhayalakkhaṇarahitassa sabhāvadhammassa abhāvā. ‘‘Vodānampi vuṭṭhāna’’nti vacanato ‘‘vodānañca vuṭṭhānapariyāyovā’’ti āha. Sabhāvadhammatte siddhe saṅkhatavidūratāya asaṅkhataṃ siyāti āha ‘‘sabhāvadhammattāsādhakattā’’ti.
457-459. 否定自性法,即否定无二相无染之法无自性存在。谓云“亦说水为流动”,言水即流动之义。自性法成就时,因所缘合相之分别,涅槃为无为法,称为“非有自性法”。
Nirodhasamāpattikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 灭尽定论释已毕。
Chaṭṭhavaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 第六品释已毕。
7. Sattamavaggo7. 第七品
1. Saṅgahitakathāvaṇṇanā1. 摄论释
§471-472
471-472.Saṅgahitāti saṅgahaṇādivasena saddhiṃ gahitā. Te pana yasmā ekavidhatādisāmaññena bandhā viya honti, tasmā āha ‘‘sambandhā’’ti.
合成者者,以合成及类似的方式共同聚集。之所以称之为「相连」,是因为它们如同由单一性质等共同结合而成的联系。
Saṅgahitakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 摄论释已毕。
2. Sampayuttakathāvaṇṇanā2. 相应论释
§473-474
473-474. Anuppavisitabbānuppavisanabhāvo tesaṃ bhede sati yujjeyya, nāññathāti upamābhindanena upameyyassa bhinnataṃ dassento ‘‘nānattavavatthā…pe… dassetī’’ti āha.
不当一观者与当一观者状态的差别出现时,应当加以区分,不可混同,因此用比喻分析表示对比物的不同,称之为『区别』。
Sampayuttakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 相应论释已毕。
3. Cetasikakathāvaṇṇanā3. 心所论释
§475-477
475-477.Phassikādayoti ettha ādi-saddo vavatthāvācī. Tena cittuppādadesanāyaṃ dassitappabhedā vedanādayo gayhanti, na taṃsamuṭṭhānā rūpadhammāti āha ‘‘ekuppādatādivirahitā sahajātatā natthī’’ti.
由触等起始的词,意指起始语。其旨在说明心的发生之理,故述明诸分别,如受等,谓无生起之情形不属于色法,故说『无一生起及类似之常有性,无生即无生起』。
Cetasikakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 心所论释已毕。
4. Dānakathāvaṇṇanā4. 布施论释
§479
479.Phaladānabhāvadīpanatthanti phaladānasabbhāvadīpanatthaṃ. Phaladānaṃ vuttaṃ viya hotīti cittena phaladānaṃ padhānabhāve vuttaṃ viya hotīti attho. Aññathā dānabhāvoti na sakkā vattuṃ. Dānabhāvopi hi ‘‘dānaṃ aniṭṭhaphala’’ntiādinā vuttoyevāti. Tannivāraṇatthanti phaladānanivāraṇatthaṃ. Etanti ‘‘dānaṃ aniṭṭhaphala’’ntiādivacanaṃ. Bhesajjādivasena ābādhāniṭṭhatā deyyadhammassa aniṭṭhaphalatāpariyāyo daṭṭhabbo.
「果报施与之无」意指整个果报施与均无。果报施与谓心中以果报施作为主旨,意即果报施被表达。若另作解释即为施与之义,不可另说为施与不存在。即使施说为“施为非善果”等,也只是此意。障碍意指障碍果报施与。所谓“施为非善果”等言,是说医治等因障碍存在,故果报施与之理须以此解释。
Kathaṃ tatheva suttaṃ sakavādiparavādivādesu yujjatīti codanāya ‘‘na pana ekenatthenā’’ti vuttaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘deyyadhammova dāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha nivattanapakkheyeva eva-kāro yutto, na sādhanapakkhe dvinnampi dānabhāvassa icchitattā. Tenāha ‘‘cetasikovāti attho daṭṭhabbo, deyyadhammovā’’ti ca. Tenevāha ‘‘dvinnañhi dānānantiādi. Saṅkarabhāvamocanatthanti satipi dānabhāve sabhāvasaṅkaramocanatthaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘cetasikassā’’tiādi.
如何同样适用于古声及异声辩论,激励之义有云『非仅一方』,以分别分析『果报施为施』等言,此处仅就反驳面而论,唯有一理相应,而非于资具面两方皆望施欲。故言『心所义应知,为果报施之』。又言『两者施』等,意在解除混乱之义,谓于真正施各别解除混乱,是为言『心所等』。
Dānakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 布施论释已毕。
5. Paribhogamayapuññakathāvaṇṇanā5. 受用福业论之解释
§485
485.Tassā laddhiyāti pañcannaṃ viññāṇānaṃ samodhānaṃ hotīti laddhiyā. Etesanti vattamānacittaparibhogamayapuññānaṃ.
『其所得』指五识之共同现前,谓所得故。即所谓现行之心所乐用之功德福报为彼所得。
§486
486.Ayaṃ vādo hīyati paribhogasseva abhāvato. Cāgacetanāya eva puññabhāvo, na cittavippayuttassa. Evanti iminā pakārena, aparibhutte deyyadhamme puññabhāvenāti attho. Aparibhutte deyyadhamme puññabhāvato eva hi puthujjanakāle dinnaṃ arahā hutvā paribhuñjante tampi puthujjane dānamevāti nicchitaṃ. Paravādīpaṭikkhepamukhena sakavādaṃ patiṭṭhāpeti paṭhamo atthavikappo, dutiyo pana ujukameva sakavādaṃ patiṭṭhāpetīti ayametesaṃ viseso.
此论辩因其所依赖之境界丧失,如同无用之物而衰败。所谓布施之善业,实为心不分别者之功德。因如此种说法,意指未执持世间法时,唯凭善业而获布施。众生于凡夫时虽已受布施,但既成阿拉汉则不复享用,然於凡夫时仍为布施,故明确此意。第一义理说,为立正语者,藉由否定他说;第二义理则是纯正的承认正语。此为二者分别之处。
Paribhogamayapuññakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 受用福业论之解释已毕。
6. Itodinnakathāvaṇṇanā6. 从此所施论之解释
§488-491
488-491.Tenevacīvarādidānenāti anumodanaṃ vinā dāyakena pavattitacīvarādidānena. Tenāha ‘‘sayaṃkatena kammunā vināpī’’ti. Iminā kāraṇenāti anumoditattāva tesaṃ tattha bhogā uppajjantīti etena kāraṇena. Yadi yantiādi paravādino laddhipatiṭṭhāpanākāradassanaṃ. Tattha yadi na yāpeyyuṃ, kathaṃ anumodeyyuṃ, cittaṃ pasādeyyuṃ, pītiṃ uppādeyyuṃ, somanassaṃ paṭilabheyyunti ekacce aññe pete anumodanādīni katvā yāpente disvā anumodanādīni karonti, tasmā te ito dinnena yāpentīti adhippāyo.
所谓基于布施衣钵等之赠与,即指未经允诺的赠与,而非经允诺之赠与。言「自作业无损」者,因其布施无所损减以此成立。由此因缘,基于允诺,不但产生利益,且生起布施之功德。若不持守允诺说,利益如何成立?心安宁如何生起?喜悦如何现前?欢喜如何可得?部分人见他人行赠与等事则生喜悦,遂作称欢心,是故以此前所布施令其欢喜,方为主要缘由。
Itodinnakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 从此所施论之解释已毕。
7. Pathavīkammavipākotikathāvaṇṇanā7. 地界业果报等论之解释
§492
492.Attavajjehīti phassavajjehi. Na hi so eva tena sampayutto hoti. Soti phassameva paccāmasati. Sāvajjaneti āvajjanasahite, āvajjanaṃ purecārikaṃ katvā eva pavattanaketi attho. Kammūpanissayabhūtamevāti yena kammunā yathāvuttā phassādayo nibbattitā, tassa kammassa upanissayabhūtameva. Dukkhassāti āyatiṃ uppajjanakadukkhassa. ‘‘Mūlataṇhā’’ti dassetīti yojanā, tathā ‘‘upanissayabhūta’’nti etthāpi. Kammāyūhanassa kāraṇabhūtā purimasiddhā taṇhā kammassa upanissayo, katūpacite kamme bhavādīsu namanavasena pavattā hi vipākassa upanissayo.
所谓自害罪,乃指与触犯罪相对。然此非专于此罪而已,捕捉触犯实为其缘故。自害罪连带含摄捕捉以示警戒,故谓「警戒」即前所作警戒行为之再现。所谓依业而起,是指相应业所生之诸果触,是彼业之依缘也。痛苦意指未来生中所生之苦。用「根本渴」比喻,意在说明业缘生果之关系,故称「依缘」。此谓于业续集中,欲得果报之渴求为业之依缘;于不善业中虽有碍但仍通达业果。
§493
493. Okāsakatuppannaṃ akhepetvā parinibbānabhāvo sakasamayavasena codanāya yujjamānatā.
弃绝情欲之生起,借助同伴般现,共勉向涅槃境界努力。
§494
494.Kamme satīti iminā kammassa pathavīādīnaṃ paccayatāmattamāha, na janakattaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘taṃsaṃvattanikaṃ nāma hotī’’ti.
所谓业力,特指此业之地、水等五大因素之缘,而非指生之根本因。故云「此乃习性之所现」。
Pathavīkammavipākotikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 地界业果报等论之解释已毕。
8. Jarāmaraṇaṃvipākotikathāvaṇṇanā八、老死是果报等之论说
§495
495.Ekārammaṇāti idaṃ anārammaṇatāsādhanavasena sampayogalakkhaṇābhāvassa uddhaṭattā vuttaṃ, na tasseva sampayogalakkhaṇattā.
「一法无漏」意指此无漏境界乃因无碍相应而生之结合特征,非以彼相为唯一结合相。
§496
496.Abyākatānanti vipākābyākatānaṃ. Itarattha vattabbameva natthi.
496.『未表达者』是指未表达的果报。除此之外,没有其他含义。
§497
497.Tanti ‘‘aparisuddhavaṇṇatā jarāyevā’’ti vacanaṃ.
497.此中所说『非清净色泽如同老衰』之语。
Jarāmaraṇaṃvipākotikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 老死是果报等之论说已毕。
10. Vipākovipākadhammadhammotikathāvaṇṇanā十、果报与果报法、法等之论说
§501
501. Vipāko vipākassa paccayo honto aññamaññapaccayo hotīti adhippāyenāha ‘‘yassa vipākassa vipāko aññamaññapaccayo hotī’’ti. ‘‘Tappaccayāpi aññassa vipākassa uppattiṃ sandhāyā’’tiādivacanato pana jātijarāmaraṇādīnaṃ upanissayapaccayoti sakkā viññātuṃ. Purimapaṭiññāyāti ‘‘vipāko vipākadhammadhammo’’ti paṭiññāya. Imassa codanassāti ‘‘vipāko ca vipākadhammadhammo cā’’tiādinā pavattassa codanassa.
501.果报是果报的因,是相互为因的。统领者(adhippāya)说:“果报的果报是相互为因”,意即果报之间存在相互的因果关系。又有言:“因缘亦能促成他果报的产生”,此类诸语,乃是讲出生、老、死等的依止因缘,盖能知晓此义。所谓先前的证成,是指“果报即果报法”,借此确认其理。这段解说的目的,在于阐明:“果报,果报法,皆是果报”,是对此法的提示。
Vipākovipākadhammadhammotikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 果报与果报法、法等之论说已毕。
Sattamavaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 第七品之注释已毕。
8. Aṭṭhamavaggo八、第八品
1. Chagatikathāvaṇṇanā一、六趣论注释
§503-504
503-504. Vaṇṇā eva nīlādivasena nibhātīti vaṇṇanibhā, vaṇṇāyatananti attho. Saṇṭhānaṃ dīghādi.
503-504.色彩仅如天蓝等色光辉耀眼,谓色的光辉,即是色处的意义。色处称为色的所在。『聚集』指其长远状态。
Chagatikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 六趣论注释结束。
2. Antarābhavakathāvaṇṇanā二、中有论注释
§505
505.Antaraṭṭhānānīti antarikaṭṭhānāni. Nivārakaṭṭhānāni bhinditvā ca ākāsena ca gamanato. Yadi so bhavānaṃ antarā na siyāti so antarābhavo kāmabhavādīnaṃ bhavānaṃ antare yadi na bhaveyya. Na nāma antarābhavoti ‘‘sabbena sabbaṃ natthi nāma antarābhavo’’ti evaṃ pavattassa sakavādivacanassa paṭikkhepe kāraṇaṃ natthi, tassa paṭikkhepe kāraṇaṃ hadaye ṭhapetvā na paṭikkhipati, atha kho tathā anicchanto kevalaṃ laddhiyā paṭikkhipatīti attho.
505.『内部空间』者,谓内在空间。驱遮空间层分离,及在虚空中运动。若此处不为色法的空间,便非欲界生存等的空间。所谓无间空间,即完全无所有的无间空间。因否定说并无该空间,因缘无故不能证成立,但若于心中置此因缘,则不成立。因有所得,即无愿复不复真义所转述。
§506
506. Jātīti na icchatīti sambandho.
506.『生』指因缘关系,而非欲望之意。
§507
507.Evaṃtaṃ tattha na icchatīti kāmabhavādīsu viya taṃ cutipaṭisandhiparamparaṃ tattha antarābhavāvatthāya na icchati. So hi tassa bhāvibhavanibbattakakammato eva pavattiṃ icchati, tasmā jātijarāmaraṇāni aniccato kuto cutipaṭisandhiparamparā. Ayañca vādo antarābhavavādīnaṃ ekaccānaṃ vutto. Ye ‘‘appakena kālena sattāheneva vā paṭisandhiṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti vadanti, ye pana ‘‘tattheva cavitvā āyātīti sattasattāhānī’’ti vadanti, tehi anuññātāva cutipaṭisandhiparamparāti te adhunātanā daṭṭhabbā pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘antarābhave sattā jāyanti jīyanti mīyanti cavanti upapajjantīti? Na hevaṃ vattabbe’’ti āgatattā. Yathā cetaṃ, evaṃ nirayūpagādibhāvampissa adhunātanā paṭijānanti. Tathā hi te vadanti ‘‘uddhaṃpādo tu nārako’’tiādi. Tattha yaṃ nissāya paravādī antarābhavaṃ nāma parikappeti, taṃ dassetuṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘antarāparinibbāyīti suttapadaṃ ayoniso gahetvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Imassa hi ‘‘avihādīsu tattha tattha āyuvemajjhaṃ anatikkamitvā antarā aggamaggādhigamena anavasesakilesaparinibbānena parinibbāyati, antarāparinibbāyī’’ti suttapadassa ayamattho, na antarābhavabhūtoti. Tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘antarāparinibbāyīti suttapadaṃ ayoniso gahetvā’’ti.
「507. 如此而言,在此处非愿之故,如同在欲界等生命中,生死相续的连贯因果中存在间行状态,因而不称为非愿。盖因此者唯其依赖造作生灭业之流转而欲发生,故由此认识诞生、老、病、死皆无常,那儿又有生死相续无间断之说呢?此论旨乃由间行存在论者之部分所宣说。彼等有言,“于极短时间内,或仅数周即得转生”,又有言“即于彼处即身亡,复于七七日内再来”,对此等说法,后代注释者根据本处“间行期间有生命生灭”之意,否定生死连续说。正如此,后人断定诸如地狱等界之短暂存在亦属现代诸说。对此所谓间行论之核心内容,注释书述曰:“『间行涅槃』一语,乃以不正观察取经文之意”。实则该句意指:“因诸存在于无明等烦恼未断之现状中,寿命尚未中断之前,在间行中以正道最上超脱无余结净灭涅槃”,非谓其为间行存有。由此证成“间行涅槃”乃误解经文之说。
Ye pana ‘‘sambhavesīti vacanato attheva antarābhavo. So hi sambhavaṃ upapattiṃ esatīti sambhavesī’’ti vadanti, tepi ye bhūtāva na puna bhavissanti, te khīṇāsavā ‘‘bhūtānaṃ vā sattānaṃ ṭhitiyā’’ti ettha ‘‘bhūtā’’ti vuttā. Tabbidhuratāya sambhavamesantīti sambhavesino, appahīnabhavasaṃyojanattā sekkhā puthujjanā. Catūsu vā yonīsu aṇḍajajalābujā sattā yāva aṇḍakosaṃ vatthikosañca na bhindanti, tāva sambhavesī nāma, aṇḍakosato vatthikosato ca nikkhantā bhūtā nāma. Saṃsedajaopapātikā ca paṭhamacittakkhaṇe sambhavesī nāma, dutiyacittakkhaṇato paṭṭhāya bhūtā nāma. Yena vā iriyāpathena jāyanti, yāva tato aññaṃ na pāpuṇanti, tāva sambhavesī nāma, tato paraṃ bhūtā nāmāti evaṃ ujuke pāḷianugate atthe sati kiṃ aniddhāritassa patthiyena antarābhavena attabhāvena parikappitena payojananti paṭikkhipitabbā.
又言“生起者”一词于此即是间行。盖其意指发起出现,即生起。此生起者,虽指诸已灭者,将不复生者,殊为已断烦恼者言说。此处“已灭者”即谓已作罢存在者。以其生起之种类,凡凡众生分为四类:卵生、湿生、胎生、水生之类。在卵及胚胎囊内尚未穿破前,称为生起者,出囊破壳时方称为已生者。由身体路径诞生后,尚未获得他体,称为生起者,若之后获得他体,则称为已生者。依巴利文原意,因该生起者以他因未确定,故当以间行与本体之意拒斥之。
Yaṃ paneke ‘‘santānavasena pavattamānānaṃ dhammānaṃ avicchedena desantaresu pātubhāvo diṭṭho. Yathā taṃ vīhiādiaviññāṇakasantāne, evaṃ saviññāṇakasantānepi avicchedena desantare pātubhāvena bhavitabbaṃ. Ayañca nayo sati antarābhave yujjati, nāññathā’’ti yuttiṃ vadanti, tehi iddhimato cetovasippattassa cittānugatikaṃ kāyaṃ adhiṭṭhahantassa khaṇena brahmalokato idhūpasaṅkamane ito vā brahmalokūpagamane yutti vattabbā. Yadi sabbattheva vicchinnadese dhammānaṃ pavatti na icchitā, yadipi siyā ‘‘iddhimantānaṃ iddhivisayo acinteyyo’’ti, taṃ idhāpi samānaṃ ‘‘kammavipāko acinteyyo’’ti vacanato, tasmā taṃ tesaṃ matimattameva. Acinteyyasabhāvā hi sabhāvadhammā, te katthaci paccayavasena vicchinnadese pātubhavanti, katthaci avicchinnadese ca. Tathā hi mukhaghosādīhi paccayehi aññasmiṃ dese ādāsapabbatapadesādike paṭibimbapaṭighosādikaṃ nibbattamānaṃ diṭṭhanti.
有些人说:“以果系连续中无间断传达之法为例,如稻谷等感知物连续体,亦须连续无间由教法传达。由此证实此理与间行论相应,别无他解。”对此,说推知行持有神通者若以心念相关身心,瞬时由梵天天界降临或自彼升往,乃可符合连续有效之说。若认为诸法断现无传,且又有“神通应是不可思议”的说法,则此处说法等同于“业之果报不可思议”的观点,乃其学派见解也。诸法本无界限性,为法性自然,或有条件中断而现于异处,或于不中断处现于此处。乃诸如语言喧哗故,彼处映衬当处,如波折翳影之现象,乃人所见。
Etthāha – paṭibimbaṃ tāva asiddhattā asadisattā ca na nidassanaṃ. Paṭibimbañhi nāma aññadeva rūpantaraṃ uppajjatīti asiddhametaṃ. Siddhiyampi asadisattā na nidassanaṃ siyā ekasmiṃ ṭhāne dvinnaṃ sahaṭhānābhāvato. Yattheva hi ādāsarūpaṃ paṭibimbarūpañca dissati, na ca ekasmiṃ dese rūpadvayassa sahabhāvo yutto nissayabhūtadesato, asadisañcetaṃ sandhānato. Na hi mukhassa paṭibimbasandhānabhūtaṃ ādāsasandhānasambandhattā sandhānaṃ uddissa avicchedena desantare pātubhāvo vuccati, na asantānanti asamānameva tanti.
此处说:“映像因其非实有与不实性,难以现示。”所谓映像,即他处之形体变异而生,故此非真实显现。真实显现亦非不可现示,因于一处不可能共存二者。若于某处且见投影及映像,并无一处实有二形,乃由非真实之连接故尔。映像并非由口产生,故以投影生起联系而无空间断绝之说不可成立,亦非无异非凡之物也。
Tattha yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘paṭibimbaṃ nāma aññadeva rūpantaraṃ uppajjatīti asiddhaṃ ekasmiṃ ṭhāne dvinnaṃ sahaṭhānabhāvato’’ti, tayidaṃ asantānameva sahaṭhānaṃ coditaṃ bhinnanissayattā. Na hi bhinnanissayānaṃ sahaṭhānaṃ atthi. Yathā anekesaṃ maṇidīpādīnaṃ pabhārūpaṃ ekasmiṃ padese pavattamānaṃ acchitamānatāya nirantaratāya ca abhinnaṭṭhānaṃ viya paññāyati, bhinnanissayattā pana bhinnaṭṭhānameva taṃ, gahaṇavisesena tathāabhinnaṭṭhānamattaṃ, evaṃ ādāsarūpapaṭibimbarūpesupi daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tādisapaccayasamavāyena hi tattha taṃ uppajjati ceva vigacchati ca, evañcetaṃ sampaṭicchitabbaṃ cakkhuviññāṇassa gocarabhāvūpagamanato. Aññathā ālokena vināpi paññāyeyya, cakkhuviññāṇassa vā na gocaro viya siyā. Tassa pana sāmaggiyā so ānubhāvo, yaṃ tathā dassanaṃ hotīti. Acinteyyo hi dhammānaṃ sāmatthiyabhedoti vadantenapi ayamevattho sādhito bhinnanissayassapi abhinnaṭṭhānassa viya upaṭṭhānato. Eteneva udakādīsu paṭibimbarūpābhāvacodanā paṭikkhittā veditabbā.
是曰“映像名为他处形变所生,非真实,因同处不可能二物并存”,此乃由所生无依之不相称关系提出。非相称无依则无共存。如无数宝石火光在一处现聚时,虽不断,各自犹如融为一体,似同处共存;但若无依无拘,则各异处分离乖离,形如不同。映像状投影亦当如此,由条件共存而生并灭。此当归因于眼识所及之特性,无适当光照则难以觉察,如眼识无法覆盖即不能察觉。今此合和即为同体表现,如此为实见。即便彼等说法谓诸法不可思议,然其义成立,因无依无异之共现,正如水中映像、折光等现象所示,观者可知。
Siddhe ca paṭibimbarūpe tassa nidassanabhāvo siddhoyeva hoti hetuphalānaṃ vicchinnadesatāvibhāvanato. Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ ‘‘asadisattā na nidassana’’nti, tadayuttaṃ. Kasmā? Na hi nidassanaṃ nāma nidassitabbena sabbadā sadisameva hoti. Cutikkhandhādhānato vicchinnadese upapattikkhandhā pātubhavantīti etassa atthassa sādhanatthaṃ mukharūpato vicchinne ṭhāne tassa phalabhūtaṃ paṭibimbarūpaṃ nibbattatīti ettha tassa nidassanatthassa adhippetattā. Etena asantānacodanā paṭikkhittā veditabbā.
映像既成,难以现示之义乃由因缘断绝故,使因果关系难以显现。又言“非真实显示”,此理相应者何耶?非真实显现者,务必与可显现者殊无分别。因小聚集断续处之生起,映像遂显现。此即为显现之缘由。故此映像非实存,而由非实现象的遮蔽提示而显现,实系因缘所成。如是故,映像之非实显示应视作提示而非实有。
Yasmā vā mukhapaṭibimbarūpānaṃ hetuphalabhāvo siddho, tasmāpi sā paṭikkhittāva hoti. Hetuphalabhāvasambandhesu hi santānavohāro. Yathāvuttadvīhikāraṇehi paṭibimbaṃ uppajjati bimbato ādāsato ca, na cevaṃ upapattikkhandhānaṃ vicchinnadesuppatti. Yathā cettha paṭibimbarūpaṃ nidassitaṃ, evaṃ paṭighosadīpamuddādayopi nidassitabbā. Yathā hi paṭighosadīpamuddādayo saddādihetukā honti, aññatra agantvā honti, evameva idaṃ cittanti.
既然因果之相像镜面上形象的特征已然成就,因此此因果亦具断绝的性质。因果性质的连属确为因缘的传续。如同车轴之缘而显现车轮影像,车轮倒映成像,断非因现时聚合而生起。此处所说的镜面影像,亦当如实说明感官震动之光起。因震动之光本为声响等因,非他因而来,心识亦如是。
Apicāyaṃ antarābhavavādī evaṃ pucchitabbo – yadi ‘‘dhammānaṃ vicchinnadesuppatti na yuttā’’ti antarābhavo parikappito, rāhuādīnaṃ sarīre kathamanekayojanasahassantarikesu pādaṭṭhānahadayaṭṭhānesu kāyaviññāṇamanoviññāṇuppatti vicchinnadese yuttā. Yadi ekasantānabhāvato, idhāpi taṃsamānaṃ. Na cettha arūpadhammabhāvato alaṃ parihārāya pañcavokāre rūpārūpadhammānaṃ aññamaññaṃ sambandhattā. Vattamānehi tāva paccayehi vicchinnadese phalassa uppatti siddhā, kimaṅgaṃ pana atītehi pañcavokārabhavehi. Yattha vipākaviññāṇassa paccayo, tatthassa nissayabhūtassa vatthussa sahabhāvīnañca khandhānaṃ sambhavoti laddhokāsena kammunā nibbattiyamānassa avasesapaccayantarasahitassa vipākaviññāṇassa uppattiyaṃ nālaṃ vicchinnadesatā vibandhāya. Yathā ca anekakappasahassantarikāpi cutikkhandhā upapattikkhandhānaṃ anantarapaccayoti na kāladūratā, evaṃ anekayojanasahassantarikāpi te tesaṃ anantarapaccayo hontīti na desadūratā. Evaṃ cutikkhandhanirodhānantaraṃ upapattiṭṭhāne paccayantarasamavāyena paṭisandhikkhandhā pātubhavantīti nattheva antarābhavo. Asati ca tasmiṃ yaṃ tassa keci ‘‘bhāvibhavanibbattakakammuno tato eva bhāvipurimakālabhavākāro sajātisuddhadibbacakkhugocaro ahīnindriyo kenaci appaṭihatagamano gandhāhāro’’ti evamādikāraṇākārādiṃ vaṇṇenti, taṃ vañjhātanayassa rassadīghasāmatādivivādasadisanti veditabbaṃ.
除此之外,针对此说诸法断绝生起不相应说,须问:若说断绝生起为断续,则为什么月蚀等现象于尸体上,乃至千百由旬间的脚、胸等处,身识与心识分别产生,断绝生起竟能相应?若认为仅为一连续体,此处亦应同理。非因无形法不更有五蕴内色法相互联系之说。现行的因缘中断绝生起果实已成,此为过去劳动所生,不会随过去五蕴再生而消失。因果识作为果依赖之本与五蕴共生,身口意行为业所转,果报识在果果中成生,故断绝生起无碍。且历经多劫之间,小聚五蕴相续无间隔,非时间远近之别。由此断灭五蕴之后聚续生存为缘,五蕴依缘续转,不存中断生灭故,断续生起说不足。若此存在,谓某前世现有生前行为,会生净明无损之天眼,为非业触染之识,能感诸香等感受。这种因果内涵等论,说明其因缘存在疑难,理应辨明。
Antarābhavakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 中有论注释结束。
3. Kāmaguṇakathāvaṇṇanā三、欲功德论注释
§510
510.Sabbepīti kusalākusalakkhandhādayopi. Tesampi hi ālambanatthikatālakkhaṇassa kattukamyatāchandassa vasena siyā kamanaṭṭhatāti adhippāyo. Dhātukathāyaṃ ‘‘kāmabhavo pañcahi khandhehi ekādasahi āyatanehi sattarasahi dhātūhi saṅgahito. Katihi asaṅgahito? Na kehici khandhehi ekenāyatanena ekāya dhātuyā asaṅgahito’’ti āgatattā āha ‘‘upādinnakkhandhānameva kāmabhavabhāvo dhātukathāyaṃ dassito’’ti. Pañcāti gaṇanaparicchedo, tadaññagaṇananivattanatthoti ‘‘pañca kāmaguṇā’’ti vacanaṃ tato aññesaṃ tabbhāvaṃ nivattetīti āha ‘‘pañceva kāmakoṭṭhāsā kāmoti vuttā’’ti. Tato eva kāmadhātūti vacanaṃ na aññassa nāmaṃ, tesaṃyeva nāmanti attho. Tayidaṃ paravādino matimattanti vuttaṃ ‘‘iminā adhippāyenā’’ti. Evaṃ vacanamattanti evaṃ ‘‘pañcime kāmaguṇā’’ti vacanamattaṃ nissāya, na panatthassa aviparītaṃ atthanti attho.
三宝说,善恶五蕴诸法亦应如此考察。五蕴由依止性正要相所促成,如此执着欲望者多。论元素中说「欲性聚合于五蕴、一十一处、十七界」,若疏离聚合,五蕴分别不可散乱。因果相续已然成立,不会断裂。故佛言于有欲五蕴乃是五欲根,不可分离,其他要法依此为基。由此,正如此五欲纂集为名,非他由生。此即此处意旨,欲性乃称为五欲根与诸处及诸元素有所连属。此言论者,即欲性成于五蕴,是为聚合说明,不可分割。故诸教义言依此五蕴为基础法门,此以示理。
Kāmaguṇakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 欲功德论注释结束。
5. Rūpadhātukathāvaṇṇanā5. 色界论释
§515-516
515-516.Rūpadhātūti vacanatoti ‘‘kāmadhāturūpadhātuarūpadhātū’’ti ettha rūpadhātūti vuttattā. Rūpīdhammehevāti ruppanasabhāvehiyeva dhammehi. ‘‘Tayome bhavā’’tiādinā paricchinnāti tayome bhavā , tisso dhātuyoti ca evaṃ paricchinnā. ‘‘Dhātuyā āgataṭṭhāne bhavena paricchinditabbaṃ, bhavassa āgataṭṭhāne dhātuyā paricchinditabba’’nti hi vuttaṃ, tasmā kāmarūpārūpāvacaradhammāva taṃtaṃbhummabhāvena paricchinnā evaṃ vuttā.
论说五十五处欲,意指依五色五根诸元素言,是为欲色。五十五处中居三界,乃三类元素。所别述者,即三归类归析为三元素,如是计数。若言元素应分别境界显现,元素与境界二者互为显说。故 kāma-rūpa与ā rūpa所以云「由存在所分别」,因元素与法性相互分离,如是言下断说。
Rūpadhātukathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 色界论释已毕。
6. Arūpadhātukathāvaṇṇanā6. 无色界论释
§517-518
517-518.Purimakathāyanti rūpadhātukathāyaṃ. Avisesenāti pavattiṭṭhānavasena visesaṃ akatvā.
前文所说,谓论三归类元素说。除别说者,指现象依作用场所成立,无差别为除别。
Arūpadhātukathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 无色界论释已毕。
7. Rūpadhātuyāāyatanakathāvaṇṇanā7. 色界处论释
§519
519.Okāsabhāvenāti vatthubhāvena. Tathāvidhanti ghānādiākāraṃ.
云于身体性即材料性。此类同山石等形态物质。
Rūpadhātuyāāyatanakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 色界处论释已毕。
8. Arūperūpakathāvaṇṇanā八、无色与色之论释
§524-526
524-526.Nissaraṇaṃ nāma nissaritabbe sati hoti, na asati, tasmā ‘‘arūpabhave sukhumarūpaṃ atthi, yato nissaraṇaṃ taṃ āruppa’’nti āha.
关于驱摈,名为必定有驱摈者之正念,而非无正念。故云“无色界中有微妙无量色胜妙法,正因有驱摈,故名无色。”
Arūperūpakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 无色与色之论释已毕。
9. Rūpaṃkammantikathāvaṇṇanā九、色为业所作之论释
§527-537
527-537.Pakappayamānāti pakārehi kappayamānā attano sampayuttānañca kiccaṃ samatthayamānā. Tenāha ‘‘sampayuttesu adhikaṃ byāpāraṃ kurumānā’’ti.
所谓连结者,即以适当方式而正当连结,且能施行自身之任务。故说“在连结中者更能担当诸多事务。”
Rūpaṃkammantikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 色为业所作之论释已毕。
10. Jīvitindriyakathāvaṇṇanā十、命根之论释
§540
540.Antaṃgahetvā vadatīti ‘‘atthi arūpadhammānaṃ āyu ṭhiti yapanā yāpanā iriyanā vattanā pālanā, atthi arūpajīvitindriya’’nti tasmiṃ pañhe ‘‘atthi arūpajīvitindriya’’nti imaṃ antaṃ pariyosānaṃ gahetvā vadati. Vattuṃ yutto samudāyassa icchanto tadavayavassa icchatīti. Na hi avayavehi vinā samudāyo nāma atthi.
此处说“在终结之际,答曰:‘无色法中有寿命、住持、维持、行为及感觉,有无色生存根。’应对此问答取此终结,言:‘有无色生存根。’此终结乃适合论述集法之所须。因为无集无聚,亦因无缘相方有集法。
§541
541.Tamevāti arūpaṃ cittavippayuttameva.
此处“仅此”者,即指无色即心脱离色法。
§542
542.Tadāpīti samāpajjanavuṭṭhānakālepi.
“如是亦”者,即指于四禅入定及出定时同样适用。
§544-545
544-545.So yutto dvinnaṃ rūpārūpajīvitindriyānaṃ sakasamaye icchitattā.
“彼者”者,是指同时具备色界与无色界生存根时之情形。
Jīvitindriyakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 命根之论释已毕。
11. Kammahetukathāvaṇṇanā11. 业因论释
§546
546. ‘‘Pāṇātipātakammassa hetū’’tiādikassa parihānikathāyaṃ anāgatattā yo tattha āgatanayo, tameva dassento ‘‘sesanti…pe… vadatī’’ti āha. Sampaṭicchanavacananti sampaṭicchāpanavacanaṃ. Taṃ paravādiṃ. Taṃtaṃladdhisampaṭicchāpanaṃ vā gāhāpananti dassento ‘‘pakkha’’ntiādimāha.
546.“杀生业的缘起”之类的损毁说法,未来的现起者,若有,便以其出现在彼处的事实,示现说:“余剩……等(语)”,其意谓“割除之言”,即割除拘束之语。此为他方言说。复更称此为得现割除,或名为执持,说作“翼”之类。
Kammahetukathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 业因论释已毕。
Aṭṭhamavaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 第八品释已毕。
9. Navamavaggo9. 第九品
1. Ānisaṃsadassāvīkathāvaṇṇanā1. 利益显示论释
§547
547. Daṭṭhabbassa ādīnavato ānisaṃsato ca yadipi paravādinā pacchā nānācittavasena paṭiññātaṃ, pubbe pana ekato katvā paṭijāni, na ca taṃ laddhiṃ pariccaji. Tenassa adhippāyamaddanaṃ yuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘anicca…pe… paṭiññātattā’’ti. Ārammaṇavasenāti ārammaṇakaraṇavasena, na kiccanipphattivasenāti adhippāyo. Idaṃ ānisaṃsakathānuyuñjanaṃ ānisaṃsadassanañca. Ñāṇaṃ vipassanā paṭivedhañāṇassa viya anubodhañāṇassapi yathārahaṃ pavattinivattīsu kiccakaraṇaṃ yuttanti adhippāyo.
547. 对当见法的逆缘及果报之理,即便后来由他方不同意心而意向相违背,为前时一意所作,仍不舍此得——此谓坚持其上之念头,此为当见。故说“无常……等(语)为所知”。所谓缘起,是作为缘发的缘起,不是具现境界的结果;此为逆缘之说法总结,亦是因缘现见之示现。此知识正如内观分辨所知,或内悟之知,随入随出时,行事宜持之——此谓当见。
Ānisaṃsadassāvīkathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 利益显示论释已毕。
2. Amatārammaṇakathāvaṇṇanā二、不死所缘论之解释
§549
549.Evamādinā suttabhayenāti ettha ādi-saddena ‘‘anāsavañca vo, bhikkhave, dhammaṃ desessāmi anāsavagāminiñca paṭipada’’ntiādīni suttapadāni saṅgaṇhāti.
549. 如此类者,是为经中所畏惧者。在此,以“无染净”、“诸比库,当知法”、“修习无染行”等经文开头句,收集经文语句。
Amatārammaṇakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 不死所缘论之解释已毕。
3. Rūpaṃsārammaṇantikathāvaṇṇanā三、色为所缘等论之解释
§552-553
552-553. ‘‘Tadappatiṭṭhaṃ anārammaṇa’’ntiādīsu paccayattho ārammaṇa-saddo. ‘‘Rūpāyatanaṃ cakkhuviññāṇadhātuyā taṃsampayuttakānañca dhammānaṃ ārammaṇapaccayena paccayo’’tiādīsu olubbhaṭṭhoti āha ‘‘paccayaṭṭho olubbhaṭṭho’’ti. Evaṃ vibhāge vijjamāneti tattha paccayāyattavuttitā paccayaṭṭho, daṇḍarajjuādi viya dubbalassa cittacetasikānaṃ ālambitabbatāya upatthambhanaṭṭho olubbhaṭṭho. Visesābhāvaṃ paccayabhāvasāmaññena kappetvā vā.
552-553.“彼之依止无缘”等诸类,为缘部用“缘”一词。色处因眼识及其和合法产生缘起之理说等,引发佛典中称为“浅显处”、“缘处浅显”等。倘如杖绳等,用以防护心意微弱者,称为依止边利处。缘的同通性质所构者,亦可称为特性缘。
Rūpaṃsārammaṇantikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 色为所缘等论之解释已毕。
4. Anusayāanārammaṇātikathāvaṇṇanā四、随眠非所缘等论之解释
§554-556
554-556. ‘‘Imasmiṃ satī’’ti iminā maggena aniruddhatāpi saṅgahitāti āha ‘‘appahīnattāva atthīti vuccatī’’ti. Na pana vijjamānattāti avadhāraṇena nivattitaṃ dasseti, vijjamānattā dharamānattā khaṇattayasamaṅgibhāvatoti attho.
554-556.“在此正念”等句,说明虽此道未断灭,仍能聚合正念,故谓“善益所用”是也。然非谓其已全部明了,而指其现起、共存无间断妙理。
Anusayāanārammaṇātikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 随眠非所缘等论之解释已毕。
5. Ñāṇaṃanārammaṇantikathāvaṇṇanā五、对“智无所缘”之论的注释
§557-558
557-558. Yassa adhigatattā arahato pariññeyyādīsu anavasesato sammoho vigato, taṃ aggamaggañāṇaṃ sandhāya ‘‘maggañāṇassā’’ti vadanti. Yasmā tassa sabbassa satokāritā viya sampajānakāritā, tasmā tena ñāṇena so ñāṇī. Satipaññāvepullappatto hi so uttamapuriso.
557-558. 由阿拉汉所具智慧通达之现见真理,因其无杂染无迷惑,且皆令一切明了,故名“道智慧”。因此智慧,此者即智者。因正念和智慧俱足,故为优越圣人。
Ñāṇaṃanārammaṇantikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 对“智无所缘”之论的注释已完。
7. Vitakkānupatitakathāvaṇṇanā七、对“随寻而起”之论的注释
§562
562.Dvīhipīti dvīhi visesehi, visesena visesaṃ akatvāti attho.
562.「双受味」是指由两种感受特别区分而生,由这种特有区别而无差错,这就是其义。
Vitakkānupatitakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 对“随寻而起”之论的注释已完。
8. Vitakkavipphārasaddakathāvaṇṇanā八、对“寻之扩散为声音”之论的注释
§563
563.Sabbasoti sabbappakārato, so pana pakāro pavattiṭṭhānakālavasena gahetabboti āha ‘‘sabbattha sabbadā vā’’ti. Te ca ṭhānakālā ‘‘vitakkayato’’tiādivacanato cittavisesavasena gahetabbāti vuttaṃ ‘‘savitakkacittesū’’ti. ‘‘Vitakketvā vācaṃ bhindatī’’ti suttapadaṃ ayoniso gahetvā ‘‘vitakkavipphāramattaṃ saddo’’ti āha.
563.「一切」字意涵盖一切方面。但此处所说的一切,是指从作用、发生、持续三时段而把握的,因此宣说为『无论何处无论何时』。而这三时段,依照『思维所起』等语,乃指内心区别特征而把握,因此说是『带思维心』。又经云『断除思维即断语』,这是违背理智的解释,故说『思维散乱的声音』。
Vitakkavipphārasaddakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 对“寻之扩散为声音”之论的注释已完。
9. Nayathācittassavācātikathāvaṇṇanā九、引导心语论释
§565
565. Musāvādo na hotīti vuttaṃ anāpattīti sambandho.
565.关于『虚伪语非真理』已言其不成立,说明两者有关联。
Nayathācittassavācātikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 引导心语论释已毕。
11. Atītānāgatasamannāgatakathāvaṇṇanā十一、过去未来具足论释
§568-570
568-570.Samannāgatapaññattiyāti samaṅgibhāvapaññattiyā. Tenevāha ‘‘paccuppannadhammasamaṅgī samannāgatoti vuccatī’’ti. Paṭilābhapaññattiyāti adhigamanapaññattiyā. Ayanti ‘‘samannāgato’’ti vuccamānapuggalassa yo tathā vattabbākāro, ayaṃ samannāgatapaññatti nāma. Esa nayo sesesupi.
568-570.「具足相货」是指处处完整融通之相货。因而说『此现法具足融通故名具足』。所谓『所获得相货』即得证相货,意谓对于被称为具足之人,所应了解的所作所为,此乃具足相货。此理至此为止的说明。
Atītānāgatasamannāgatakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 过去未来具足论释已毕。
Navamavaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 第九品释已毕。
10. Dasamavaggo十、第十品
1. Nirodhakathāvaṇṇanā一、灭论注释
§571-572
571-572. Sakasamaye ‘‘purimacittassa nirodhānantaraṃ pacchimacittaṃ uppajjatī’’ti icchitaṃ, paravādī pana ‘‘yasmiṃ khaṇe bhavaṅgacittaṃ, tasmiṃyeva khaṇe kiriyamayacittaṃ uppajjatī’’ti vadati. Evaṃ sati purimapacchimacittānaṃ sahabhāvopi anuññāto hoti. Tenāha ‘‘bhaṅgakkhaṇena sahevā’’ti. Tathā ca sati vipākakiriyakkhandhānaṃ viya kiriyavipākakkhandhānaṃ vipākavipākakkhandhānaṃ kiriyakiriyakkhandhānañca vuttanayena sahabhāvo vattabboti imamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘bhavaṅgacittassā’’tiādimāha. Tattha upapattibhavabhāvena esiyā icchitabbāti upapattesiyā vipākakkhandhā, te ca yebhuyyena bhavaṅgapariyāyakāti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘upapattesiyanti saṅkhaṃ gatassa bhavaṅgacittassā’’ti. Ādipariyosānamattañhi tassa paṭisandhicuticittaṃ, tadārammaṇaṃ bhavaṅgantveva vuccatīti. Cakkhuviññāṇādīnaṃ kiriyāvemajjhe patitattā kiriyācatukkhandhaggahaṇena gahaṇaṃ yuttanti vuttaṃ. Cakkhuviññāṇādīnanti hi ādi-saddena na sotaviññāṇādīnaṃyeva gahaṇaṃ, atha kho sampaṭicchanasantīraṇānampīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
571-572.有人在前心止灭之后,认为随后心起;异说则言一念现前时,即现行心同时现。如此,前心与后心之共存亦不得否认,故称「与壞时同现」。又因正念如同果报与业的结合中有共存之理,业果三法融合不异,说明此理曰『此即有为心』等。再依此解释,应理解业果蕴与有为蕴及其余分类皆具共存关系。《论疏》言此为现前有为心集合之名。起始部分仅为续接的小心,正是此时的「心境」「法门」便是有为蕴所称。于眼识等作用处,双重运动中之引摄是合理的。特别指出“眼识等”首字义并非指听识等诸根,乃视之为互摄,且应看到此非断灭之理。
Nirodhakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 灭论注释完毕。
3. Pañcaviññāṇasamaṅgissamaggakathāvaṇṇanā三、具五识者之道论注释
§576
576.Lakkhaṇanti pañcaviññāṇānaṃ uppannārammaṇatādiavitathekappakāratālakkhaṇaṃ. Kāmaṃ manoviññāṇaṃ avatthukampi hoti, savatthukatte pana tampi uppannavatthukameva. Tathā hi pāḷiyaṃ ṭhapanāyaṃ ‘‘hañci pañcaviññāṇā uppannārammaṇā’’tveva vuttaṃ. Manoviññāṇassapi uppannavatthukatāpariyāyo atthīti ‘‘pañca viññāṇā’’ti avatvā ‘‘cha viññāṇā uppannavatthukā’’ti vutte ‘‘no ca vata re vattabbe pañcaviññāṇasamaṅgissa atthi maggabhāvanā’’ti vattuṃ na sakkāti dassento āha ‘‘cha viññāṇā…pe… adhippeta’’nti.
576.「相」是指五识之现起境界等不同类别的特征。欲识亦不为实有境界,但于实有状态下还存在。正如巴利语中所说「五识之现起境界不灭」,说明欲识现起境界之消长。关于识之现起境界的定义,应理解为五识中有六识之说,所以说『不然,难以建立修道』,因而说明『六识……为主导』之意。
§577
577. ‘‘Animittaṃ suññataṃ appaṇihita’’nti nibbānassa te pariyāyā. Cakkhuviññāṇassa animittagāhibhāve suññatārammaṇatāpi siyāti vuttaṃ ‘‘tadeva suññatanti adhippāyo’’ti.
577.“无相空性、非设立”是涅槃的三种别名。眼识的无相深妙境界亦显现为空性境相,有文献说:“这正是所谓空性之总摄。”
Pañcaviññāṇasamaṅgissamaggakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 具五识者之道论注释完毕。
5. Pañcaviññāṇāsābhogātikathāvaṇṇanā五、五识有作意论注释
§584-586
584-586.Sā pana namitvā pavatti. Ārammaṇappakāraggahaṇanti ārammaṇassa iṭṭhāniṭṭhappakārassa gahaṇaṃ. Yena ārammaṇappakāraggahaṇena kusalacittassa alobhādīhi sampayogo akusalacittassa lobhādīhi sampayogo hoti, so ābhogoti dasseti.
584-586.这一说法乃是因而起,为缘起。所谓摄取境界之利方便,是指对境界的喜欢与不喜欢的利害关系。由此摄取境界之利方便,善心则与无贪等心相应,不善心则与贪等心相应,此即所谓“所得”之意。
Pañcaviññāṇāsābhogātikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 五识有作意论注释完毕。
6. Dvīhisīlehītikathāvaṇṇanā6. 二三戒论之解释
§587-589
587-589.Appavattinirodhanti anuppādanirodhaṃ. Sīlassa vītikkamoyeva nirodho sīlavītikkamanirodho. Ninnānaṃ khaṇikanirodhaṃ sallakkhento.
587-589.“断除”“止息”指无生无灭之止灭。戒律的断尽即戒律断尽。此亦指某一片刻的断灭,予以特征。
Dvīhisīlehītikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 二三戒论之解释已毕。
7. Sīlaṃacetasikantikathāvaṇṇanā7. 戒非心所论之解释
§590-594
590-594.Ṭhitena avinaṭṭhena. Upacayenāti sīlabhūtena kammūpacayena. ‘‘Dānaṃ acetasika’’nti kathāyaṃ vuttanayenāti yathā ‘‘na vattabbaṃ cetasiko dhammo dānanti? Āmantā. Dānaṃ aniṭṭhaphalanti…pe… tena hi cetasiko dhammo dāna’’nti pāḷi pavattā, evaṃ tadanusārena ‘‘na vattabbaṃ cetasikaṃ sīlanti? Āmantā. Sīlaṃ aniṭṭhaphala’’ntiādinā sīlassa cetasikabhāvasādhakāni suttapadāni ca ānetvā tadatthadassanavasena acetasiko rūpādidhammo āyatiṃ vipākaṃ deti. Yadi so sīlaṃ bhaveyya, vinā saṃvarasamādānena vinā viratiyā sīlavā nāma siyā. Yasmā pana samādānacetanā virati saṃvaro sīlaṃ, tasmā ‘‘sīlaṃ iṭṭhaphalaṃ kantaphala’’ntiādinā yojanā kātabbāti imamatthaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘vuttanayenā’’ti, vuttanayānusārenāti attho. Yasmā pana pāḷiyaṃ yathā ‘‘sīlaṃ acetasika’’nti kathā āgatā, tathā ‘‘dānaṃ acetasika’’nti visuṃ āgatā kathā natthi, tasmā ‘‘sā pana kathā maggitabbā’’ti vuttaṃ.
590-594.所谓恒常不变者,以戒业恒存之故称。所谓秉持,乃谓戒所生之业果的维持。关于“布施无心”一语,藏有如下言说:有人问,“布施岂非有心之法乎?”答曰:“布施不产生恶果……依此亦有‘戒非有心’等语。”由此得见戒律之有心相,及其果报眷属。如若持戒,却无束缚定心及离欲,此戒不谓善戒。因定心、意志、束缚即为戒,所以有人将戒比作“理想果”、“边果”等,加以连接说明。巴利话中既有“戒为无心”,却无“布施为无心”之语,所以当依此理断定。
Sīlaṃacetasikantikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 戒非心所论之解释已毕。
9. Samādānahetukathāvaṇṇanā9. 受持为因论之解释
§598-600
598-600. Samādānahetukathāyaṃ ‘‘phasso detī’’ti ārabhitvā yāva kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāgā dhammā sammukhībhāvaṃ āgacchantīti ārāmaropādisuttāharaṇañcāti ettakameva paribhogakathāya sadisanti āha ‘‘samādāna…pe… daṭṭhabbā’’ti.
598-600.关于持心原因之说,先言“触感现时”,继而阐述由少苦痛部分逐渐至苦乐诸法共同出现之现象,此乃缘起之序。此外,还有对外境作用之引述与取舍说法,类似于因缘之现成,故云“持心……宜可见”。
Samādānahetukathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 受持为因论之解释已毕。
11. Aviññattidussīlyantikathāvaṇṇanā十一、无表恶戒论释
§603-604
603-604. Mahābhūtāni upādāya pavatto aññacittakkhaṇepi labbhamāno kusalākusalānubandho aviññattīti ayaṃ vādo ‘‘cittavippayutto apuññūpacayo’’ti iminā saṅgahitoti tato aññānubandhāyaṃ ‘‘āṇattiyā’’tiādi vuttanti taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘āṇattiyā…pe… adhippāyo’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha āṇatto yadā āṇattabhāvena vihiṃsādikiriyaṃ sādheti, tadā āṇattiyā pāṇātipātādīsu aṅgabhāvo veditabbo. Sā panāṇatti pārivāsikabhāvena viññattirahitā nāma hotīti paravādino adhippāyo, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ekasmiṃ divase’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
603-604.因缘所生为大要素,若在异心之际仍由觉知获悉善恶因果,则谓之无意识,这是“心断除业力”之论述由此集合而成。因果相续名“业障”,为使觉知灭除障碍故作告知。从此因果相续之义,遂有“业障”及“重罪”等相互区别,谓若凭重罪心行伤害行为,则此罪障为除之部分。尚且“重罪障”乃由恶意执念引发,称为非觉知,来自外犯者的观点亦是此说,并据“某一日”等词加以说明。
Aviññattidussīlyantikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 无表恶戒论释已毕。
Dasamavaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 第十品释已毕。
Dutiyo paṇṇāsako samatto. · 第二五十已完。
11. Ekādasamavaggo十一、第十一品
4. Ñāṇakathāvaṇṇanā四、智论释
§614-615
614-615. ‘‘Andhakā’’ti vuttā pubbaseliyaaparaseliyarājagirikasiddhatthikāpi yebhuyyena mahāsaṅghikā evāti vuttaṃ ‘‘pubbe…pe… bhaveyyu’’nti. Tattha aññeti vacanaṃ dvinnaṃ kathānaṃ ujuvipaccanīkabhāvato. Purimakānañhi cakkhuviññāṇādisamaṅgī ‘‘ñāṇī’’ti vuccati, imesaṃ so eva ‘‘ñāṇī’’ti na vattabboti vutto. Rāgavigamo rāgassa samucchindanaṃ, tathā aññāṇavigamo. Yathā samucchinnāvijjo ‘‘ñāṇī’’ti, paṭipakkhato ‘‘aññāṇī’’ti, evaṃ asamucchinnāvijjo ‘‘aññāṇī’’ti, paṭipakkhato ‘‘ñāṇī’’ti vutto. Aññāṇassa vigatattā so ‘‘ñāṇī’’ti vattabbataṃ āpajjati, na pana satataṃ samitaṃ ñāṇassa pavattanatoti adhippāyo.
614-615节。“暗昧者”如是说,意指先前在希利亚及旁希利亚住处的王舍城得道者,亦即广大部派居士,故也有言“在先世……必有所为”。此处“他者”之语,具明确的正反对立涵义。先行者所称的“智者”,是眼识等为相续的智者,然此类智者自非唯一可称为“智者”。欲断者,是指断除渴爱;同理,非智者者亦如是。譬如断除无明者称为“智者”,其反义为“不智者”;反之未断无明者称为“不智者”,其反则为“智者”。由此可见,不智者断除的状况,则当称为“智者”,此非恒常连续恒量之知识运行,故不能强加此义。
Ñāṇakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 智论注释终了。
7. Iddhibalakathāvaṇṇanā七、神通力论注释
§621-624
621-624. Yasmiṃ āyukappe kammakkhayena maraṇaṃ hoti, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘kammassa vipākavasenā’’ti, yasmiṃ pana āyukkhayena maraṇaṃ hoti, taṃ sandhāya ‘‘vassagaṇanāyā’’ti. Tattha ‘‘na ca tāva kālaṃ karoti, yāva na taṃ pāpakammaṃ byantī hotī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.250; a. ni. 3.36) vacanato yebhuyyena niraye kammakkhayena maraṇaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘kammassa vipākavasena vāti nirayaṃva sandhāya vutta’’nti. ‘‘Vassasataṃ vassasahassaṃ vassasatasahassānī’’tiādinā manussānaṃ devānañca āyuparicchedavacanato yebhuyyena tesaṃ āyukkhayena maraṇaṃ hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘vassagaṇanāya vāti manusse cātumahārājikādideve ca sandhāyā’’ti. ‘‘Vutta’’nti ānetvā yojetabbaṃ.
621-624节。若因业的消尽而在生命期满时死亡,故有“业的果报之故”之说;若为寿命终结而死,则称为“以年数计”。有言“不及彼时,恶业未成熟”,此义出现于《大念处经》三百五十页、《大阿毗达摩经》三十六页等处,主要说明往生地狱者是因业报消尽而死,如言:“业报之故故称为地狱”。诸如“百年、千年、万年”等说法,是指人及天众寿命期满而死,由此故称为“以年数计”,此用于人间、四大王及天众之寿命。须引为证据使用。
Iddhibalakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 神通力论注释终了。
8. Samādhikathāvaṇṇanā八、定论注释
§625-626
625-626.Samaṃ ṭhapanaṭṭhenāti samaṃ visamaṃ līnuddhaccādiṃ paṭibāhitvā, vikkhepameva vā viddhaṃsetvā ṭhapanaṭṭhena. ‘‘Cittasantati samādhī’’ti vadantena tassa cetasikabhāvo paṭikkhitto hotīti āha ‘‘cetasikantaraṃ atthīti aggahetvā’’ti. Bhāvanāya āhitavisesāya ekaggatāya vijjamānavisesapaṭikkhepo chalaṃ, so panassa anāhitavisesāya ekaggatāya sāmaññenāti āha ‘‘sāmaññamattenā’’ti.
625-626节。“同立不正者”,谓将同与不同、净与不净、悬置立场等相对抵触并存者,称为“不正立”。因心相续内部对立,意谓心所之间相互摧毁,于是称之“心法相互破坏”。论曰:“心所之间含义为最高毁坏(aggahetvā)”。修习中特别指明一境界上专注聚精时意念动摇,如称“专注不过于专注”,意谓只是普遍的恪守。
Samādhikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 定论注释终了。
9. Dhammaṭṭhitatākathāvaṇṇanā九、法住性论注释
§627
627.Avijjāyayā ṭhitatāti avijjāya saṅkhārānaṃ anantarapaccayabhāve yā niyatatā dhammaniyāmatāsaṅkhātā, yā ṭhitasabhāvatā nipphannā , na dhammamattatāṭṭhitatāya nipphannāya vasena, anantarapaccayabhāvasaṅkhātā ṭhitatā paccayatā hotīti attho. Aññamaññapaccayabhāvarahitassāti idaṃ sahajātanissayādipaccayānaṃ paṭikkhepapadaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, na aññamaññapaccayatāmattassa. Sabbo tādisoti iminā samanantaraanantarūpanissayanatthivigatāsevanādikaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Aññamaññapaccayatañcāti etthāpi vuttanayena attho veditabbo. Ettha pana paccayuppannassapi paccayabhāvato saṅkhārānampi vasena yojetabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘tassā ca itarā’’ti.
627节。因无明而立者,谓无明是诸行之因缘不间断的本性,乃因诸行聚合成因,且无明已成不因纯粹法性,而是成因相续的因果关系。此中彼此因缘相互不具足,因而此“彼此因缘虽缺”是指出生种种自然之缘,不当生彼此因缘无数之义。故此皆属不在彼此相互为因缘状况。彼此因缘亦有在此语境中应被把握之义。然缘起已现者,诸行因缘亦须并立,故称“其于彼诸行”。
Dhammaṭṭhitatākathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 法住性论注释终了。
10. Aniccatākathāvaṇṇanā十、无常性论注释
§628
628. Rūpādīnaṃ aniccatā rūpādike sati hoti, asati na hotīti iminā pariyāyena tassā tehi saha uppādanirodho vutto, uppādādīsu tīsu lakkhaṇesu aniccatāvohāro hotīti yathā tayo daṇḍe upādāya pavatto tidaṇḍavohāro tesu sabbesu hoti, evaṃ jātijarāmaraṇadhammo na nicco anicco, tassa jātiādipakatitā aniccatāsaddena vuccatīti uppādādīsu lakkhaṇesu aniccatāvohāro sambhavatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘tīsu…pe… hotī’’ti. Vibhāgānuyuñjanavasenāti pabhedānuyuñjanavasena. Tattha yathā jarābhaṅgavasena aniccatā pākaṭā hoti, na tathā jātivasenāti pāḷiyaṃ jarāmaraṇavaseneva aniccatāvibhāgo dassitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
628节。色等诸法之无常,谓于色等存在时为无常,灭灭则非无常。以此缘起随同彼此,谓随色等众相出现与灭尽。于生灭三相称之无常显现,譬如三枝杖接于支点上之无常运行现象皆存,定其生死法虽非永恒不变,依生一切等故称无常。所谓生死等诸因先后次第称为无常显现,故言“于三者……为”。依区别作用,谓如老衰之显著无常,自然终末而非性质所能及,因此老死无常之别表现现见,谓非以生死为性质的无常划分,而以巴利文的老死分别显现成无常的分支。
Aniccatākathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 无常性论注释终了。
Ekādasamavaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 第十一品注释终了。
12. Dvādasamavaggo十二、第十二品
1. Saṃvarokammantikathāvaṇṇanā一、“防护即是业”论注释
§630-632
630-632. Sabbassapi manaso manodvārabhāvato ‘‘vipākadvāranti bhavaṅgamanaṃ vadatī’’ti āha.
630-632节。心的一切类型皆由心门而生,于此论曰:“谓心门是通向变异的门,通达变异即生死流转。”
Saṃvarokammantikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · “防护是业”论注释结束。
2. Kammakathāvaṇṇanā二、业论注释
§633-635
633-635.Savipākāpidassitāyeva nāma hoti vuttāvasiṭṭhā savipākāti atthasiddhattā.
633-635. "成熟显现"这名称是成立的,因为“成熟”一词具有切实证成之意。
Kammakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 业论注释结束。
4. Saḷāyatanakathāvaṇṇanā四、六处论注释
§638-640
638-640. Manāyatanekadesassa vipākassa atthitāya ‘‘avisesenā’’ti vuttaṃ.
638-640. 关于精神根之一者的成熟,其意被言为 "无分别"。
Saḷāyatanakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 六处论注释结束。
5. Sattakkhattuparamakathāvaṇṇanā五、最多七返者论注释
§641-645
641-645.Assāti imassa sattakkhattuparamassa. Tenāha ‘‘sattakkhattuparamabhāve ca niyāmaṃ icchasī’’ti. Yena ānantariyakammena. Antarāti satta bhave anibbattetvā tesaṃ antareyeva. Kecīti abhayagirivāsino. Apareti padakārā. Tassāti yo sattakkhattuparamoti vā, kolaṃkoloti vā, ekabījīti vā bhagavatā ñāṇena paricchinditvā byākato, tassa yathāvuttaparicchedā antarā uparimaggādhigamo natthi avitathadesanattā. Yathāparicchedameva tassa abhisamayo, svāyaṃ vibhāgo tesaṃyeva puggalānaṃ indriyaparopariyattena veditabbo bhavaniyāmena tādisassa kassaci abhāvato. Yasmā kassaci mudukānipi indriyāni paccayavisesena tikkhabhāvaṃ āpajjeyyuṃ, tasmā tādisaṃ sandhāya ‘‘bhabboti vuccati, na so abhabbo nāmā’’ti ca vuttaṃ. Yasmā pana bhagavā na tādisaṃ ‘‘sattakkhattuparamo’’tiādinā niyametvā byākaroti, tasmā āha ‘‘na pana antarā abhisametuṃ bhabbatā vuttā’’ti. Ayañca nayo ekantena icchitabbo. Aññathā puggalassa saṅkaro siyāti dassento ‘‘yadi cā’’tiādimāha.
641-645. “出现”是指此七十生以上。在此基础上说“因七十生以上之存在,有一定之规律意愿”。意指通过无间断的业力,在七世生中未曾涅槃,乃至于这中间。何者为无间断者?为住于阿跋鹰山者。其他为基迹。此所谓“七十生以上”者,或称“同时根”者,或称“一种种子”,由世尊以智慧洞察并说明。其间划分严格,复无超越之到达涅槃。正如划分,为其成就,自行区分众生以根之上下递移者所知。因某些微小根亦因特定条件而生微细性,因此为此类连接而称为“有根”,非无根之意。又因世尊未以“七十生以上”等限制相系,故言:“没有间断成就之差异”。此理应单纯以愿为准则。若非如此,个体业力便会混杂,即云“若如此”等语而示现。
Sattakkhattuparamakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 七次为最说之解释已毕。
Dvādasamavaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 十二品之解释已毕。
13. Terasamavaggo13. 十三品
1. Kappaṭṭhakathāvaṇṇanā1. 劫住说之解释
§654-657
654-657. ‘‘Heṭṭhā vuttādhippāyamevā’’ti idaṃ iddhibalakathāyaṃ yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘atītaṃ anāgatanti idaṃ avisesena kappaṃ tiṭṭheyyāti paṭiññātattā codetī’’tiādi, taṃ sandhāya vuttanti āha ‘‘heṭṭhāti iddhibalakathāya’’nti. Tattha ‘‘dve kappe’’tiādiāyuparicchedātikkamasamatthatācodanāvasena āgatā, idha pana saṅghabhedako āyukappameva aṭṭhatvā yadi ekaṃ mahākappaṃ tiṭṭheyya, yathā ekaṃ, evaṃ anekepi kappe tiṭṭheyyāti codanā kātabbā.
654-657. “以下所说之治法亦如是”,此乃关于神通力之论述中,所言“过去未来即此特别时代持续不息”之缔结提示。对此意为告知“以下乃神通力论说”。“其以‘二劫’之寿命划分,因超越相续性之合一”而来。而此时因僧团分裂寿命仅八劫,若一大劫长存,如此许多劫亦当长存之义应予提醒。
Kappaṭṭhakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 劫住说之解释已毕。
4. Niyatassaniyāmakathāvaṇṇanā4. 决定与不决定说之解释
§663-664
663-664.Appattaniyāmānanti ye anuppannamicchattasammattaniyatadhammā puggalā, tesaṃ dhamme. Ke pana te? Yathāvuttapuggalasantānapariyāpannā dhammā. Te hi bhūmittayapariyāpannatāya ‘‘tebhūmakā’’ti vuttā. Ye pana pattaniyāmānaṃ santāne pavattā aniyatadhammā, na tesamettha saṅgaho kato. Na hi tehi samannāgamena aniyatatā atthi. Tenevāha ‘‘tehi samannāgatopi aniyatoyevā’’ti. Imaṃ vohāramattanti iminā niyāmo nāma koci dhammo natthi, upacitasambhāratāya abhisambujjhituṃ bhabbatāva tathā vuccatīti dasseti. Niyatoti vacanassa kāraṇabhāvena vuttoti yojanā. Ubhayassapīti niyato niyāmaṃ okkamatīti vacanadvayassa.
663-664. “违规者”谓未出生之恶习、不完整规矩违规者之人身。其法律即规定下列诸法,是指以世间众生所继承之既定法。如称此法者为“地法者”。但若违反规定者于此世代中不被包括,不存在被接纳之安稳;因此才言“虽被接受,实仍不定法”。此意为约束限制,无实际之法无,惟表为维持秩序之手段,故称之。名为规矩者,以因缘关系而起,乃名义之规,双称谓法约者也。
Niyatassaniyāmakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 决定者之决定论注释已结束。
8. Asātarāgakathāvaṇṇanā八、不乐境贪论注释
§674
674.Evaṃ pavattamānoti ‘‘aho vata me bhaveyyā’’ti evaṃ patthanākārena pavattamāno. Aññathāti nandanādiākārena.
674. 如此运行,即“啊,我生在世间”之意,随此起始而发生。不然者,即如难陀等初期起事之状。
Asātarāgakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 不乐境贪论注释已结束。
9. Dhammataṇhāabyākatātikathāvaṇṇanā九、“法渴爱是无记”论注释
§676-680
676-680.Gahetvāti etena gahaṇamattameva taṃ, na pana sā tādisī atthīti dasseti. Na hi lokuttarārammaṇā abyākatā vā taṇhā atthīti. Tīhi koṭṭhāsehīti kāmabhavavibhavataṇhākoṭṭhāsehi. Rūpataṇhādibhedā chapi taṇhā.
676-680.『Gahetvā』谓以此,『gahaṇa』仅指抓住的程度,并非表示存在相应意义。因为以超世殊胜来观,不可说渴爱(Taṇhā)有明确内容。所谓三种聚集者,即指对欲界、有身界与滅尽界的渴爱之聚集。连色渴等种类分别亦属于渴爱。
Dhammataṇhāabyākatātikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · “法渴爱是无记”论注释已结束。
Terasamavaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 第十三品注释已结束。
14. Cuddasamavaggo第十四品
1. Kusalākusalapaṭisandahanakathāvaṇṇanā善与不善相连接论注释
§686-690
686-690. Anantarapaccayabhāvoyevettha paṭisandhānaṃ ghaṭanañcāti āha ‘‘anantaraṃ uppādetī’’ti.
686-690.此处所谓『结合』与『连接』,即无间缘之性质,故言『令其无间生起』。
Kusalākusalapaṭisandahanakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 善与不善相连接论注释终。
2. Saḷāyatanuppattikathāvaṇṇanā六处生起论注释
§691-692
691-692.Keci vādinoti kāpile sandhāyāha. Te hi abhibyattavādino vijjamānameva kāraṇe phalaṃ anabhibyattaṃ hutvā ṭhitaṃ pacchā abhibyattiṃ gacchatīti vadantā bījāvatthāya vijjamānāpi rukkhādīnaṃ na aṅkurādayo āvibhavanti, bījamattaṃ āvibhāvaṃ gacchatīti kathenti.
691-692. 有些持论者说是附会(Sandhāyāha),其论断谓因果不是同时,果在因之后生起再灭,如种子虽种下,树苗未即时发芽,谓种子只是种子阶段未即变成芽苗。
Saḷāyatanuppattikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 六处生起论注释终。
3. Anantarapaccayakathāvaṇṇanā无间缘论注释
§693-697
693-697.Anantaruppattiṃ sallakkhentoti cakkhuviññāṇānantaraṃ sotaviññāṇuppattiṃ maññamāno. Sotaviññāṇanti vacaneneva tassa cakkhusannissayatā rūpārammaṇatā ca paṭikkhittā, paṭiññātā ca sotasannissayatā saddārammaṇatā cāti āha ‘‘na so cakkhumhi saddārammaṇa’’nti. Tattha saddārammaṇanti ‘‘sotaviññāṇaṃ icchatī’’ti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Tayidaṃ cakkhuviññāṇassa anantaraṃ sotaviññāṇaṃ uppajjatīti laddhiyā evaṃ ñāyatīti āha ‘‘anantarūpaladdhivasena āpannattā’’ti.
693-697.谈及“无间生起”,以眼识之后生起耳识为例。眼识后随生耳识,非同时存在,也非简单并存,而是以眼识对色境的依赖消失,转而依赖耳境起耳识。此故言“非眼对声境”,意指耳识依声境而生。由此明知眼识之后耳识即生起,此即无间生起的道理,谓之“因无间果现起”而生。
Anantarapaccayakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 无间缘论之解释已毕。
4. Ariyarūpakathāvaṇṇanā4. 圣色论之解释
§698-699
698-699.Sammāvācādīti sammāvācākammantā. Tattha sammāvācā saddasabhāvā, itaro ca kāyaviññattisabhāvo, ubhayampi vā viññattīti adhippāyena rūpantissa laddhi.
698-699.『Sammāvācā』乃正语行为。正语以声为本质,身体识以身行类别为本质,二者同现或分别现起,彼此依于共同行成的理境。
Ariyarūpakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 圣色论之解释已毕。
5. Aññoanusayotikathāvaṇṇanā5. 其他随眠等论之解释
§700-701
700-701.Tasmiṃ samayeti kusalābyākatacittakkhaṇe. So hīti pacchimapāṭho.
700-701.此时谓善根显现之心念刹那,『So hīti』为本文后文之注释。
Aññoanusayotikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 其他随眠等论之解释已毕。
6. Pariyuṭṭhānaṃcittavippayuttantikathāvaṇṇanā6. 缠与心相应等论之解释
§702
702.Teti rāgādayo. Tasmāti yasmā vipassantassapi rāgādayo uppajjanti, tasmā.
七〇二。所谓诸贪欲者。因于此,虽然有正见,但欲贪等仍然生起,故称如此。
Pariyuṭṭhānaṃcittavippayuttantikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · “现起烦恼与心不相应”论的注释结束。
7. Pariyāpannakathāvaṇṇanā七、所摄论注释
§703-705
703-705.Kilesavatthuokāsavasenāti kilesakāmavatthukāmabhūmivasena. Rūpadhātusahagatavasena anusetīti kāmarāgo yathā kāmavitakkasaṅkhātāya kāmadhātuyā saha paccayasamavāye uppajjanāraho, tameva rūpadhātuyāpīti attho. Rāgādikāraṇalābhe uppattiarahatā hi anusayanaṃ.
七〇三至七〇五。谓烦恼所在,如同染污;如同烦恼欲之所在,如同欲地。又如与色法相伴,如身根等因缘相续,烦恼欲如同由欲念所生,依赖欲法生起,此即色法所缘之义。由贪欲等因缘所得生者,阿拉汉已无染污之烦恼。
Pariyāpannakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 所摄论的注释结束。
8. Abyākatakathāvaṇṇanā八、无记论注释
§706-608
706-608.Sabbathāpīti avipākabhāvenapi sassatādibhāvenapi.
七〇六至六〇八。所谓常有,就是未成熟之性质,非断灭之意,也非永恒不变之类。
Abyākatakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 无记论的注释结束。
9. Apariyāpannakathāvaṇṇanā九、非所摄论注释
§709-710
709-710.Tasmā diṭṭhi lokiyapariyāpannā na hotīti atthaṃ vadanti, evaṃ sati atippasaṅgo hoti vītadosādivohārabhāvatoti. Tato aññathā atthaṃ vadanto ‘‘rūpadiṭṭhiyā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ādi-saddena arūpadiṭṭhiādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Paravādiadhippāyavasena ayamatthavibhāvanāti āha ‘‘yadi ca pariyāpannā siyā’’ti. Tathā ca satīti diṭṭhiyā kāmadhātupariyāpannatte satīti attho. Tasmāti ‘‘vītadiṭṭhiko’’ti evaṃ vohārābhāvato. Na hi sā tassa avigatā diṭṭhi, yato so vītadiṭṭhikoti na vuccati. Yenāti kāmadiṭṭhibhāvena.
七〇九至七一〇。故谓见不偏于世俗,此义也。如此正念,则无贪嗔等之习行。复有异说:“谓如色见”等,此为聚合“无色见”等义,乃排斥他说之基。若加“若偏于世俗”则可破除。又“正念”义为见欲界法。如是则称“无正见”,此为无习见故。非谓彼无正见,且曰彼为无正见者,由于欲见之缘。
Apariyāpannakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 非所摄论注释已结束。
Cuddasamavaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 第十四品注释已结束。
15. Pannarasamavaggo十五、第十五品
1. Paccayatākathāvaṇṇanā一、缘性论注释
§711-717
711-717.Vavatthitoti asaṃkiṇṇo. Yo hi dhammo yena paccayabhāvena paccayo hoti, tassa tato aññenapi paccayabhāve sati paccayatā saṃkiṇṇā nāma bhaveyya. Viruddhāsambhavīnaṃ viya tabbidhurānaṃ paccayabhāvānaṃ sahabhāvaṃ paṭikkhipati.
七一一至七一七。所谓微小之意,谓彼法因缘相续,若此法以条件性缘起,则于他法亦有条件性缘,故称为微小。若相违则如同不同类之条件性共存被排斥。
Paccayatākathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 缘性论注释已结束。
2. Aññamaññapaccayakathāvaṇṇanā二、相互缘论注释
§718-719
718-719.Sahajātāti vuttattā na saṅkhārapaccayā ca avijjāti vuttattāti adhippāyo. Anantarādināpi hi saṅkhārā avijjāya paccayā hontiyeva. Aññamaññānantaraṃ avatvā avigatānantaraṃ sampayuttassa vacanaṃ kamabhedo, atthiggahaṇeneva gahito atthipaccayabhūtoyeva dhammo nissayapaccayo hotīti. Asādhāraṇatāyāti padantarāsādhāraṇatāya. Tenāha ‘‘vakkhati hī’’tiādi.
七一八至七一九。所谓同生,谓依前行之无明条件生起诸行。虽相续无间,然诸行确实依于无明为条件。以相续无间依存故,言诸法为条件或依止条件而成。谓“常说”者,指词语间少有间断故。故称“如此分别”及其义。
Aññamaññapaccayakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 互相缘论的注释已结束。
9. Tatiyasaññāvedayitakathāvaṇṇanā九、第三想受论注释
§732
732. Yadipi sesaṃ nāma gahitato aññaṃ, tathāpi pakaraṇaparicchinnamevettha taṃ gayhatīti dassento ‘‘yesaṃ…pe… adhippāyo’’ti vatvā puna anavasesameva saṅgaṇhanto ‘‘asaññasattānampicā’’tiādimāha. Tattha sabbasatte sandhāyāti adhippāyoti yojanā. Pāṇisamphassāpi kamantītiādikaṃ sarīrapakatīti sambandho.
732. 即便余余事乃称为掌握他者,如此处论器物种类,亦谓之掌握。释曰:「其所依止……如是说,立言之后,再加未尽之述,谓『存在非我之物等』等语。」其中所谓一切存在所依,即依止,亦谓契合。执手触或持用之类,皆身体之显现,故称关联。
§733-734
733-734. Pañcahi viññāṇehi na cavati, na upapajjatīti vādaṃ paravādī nānujānātīti āha ‘‘sutta…pe… vattabba’’nti.
733-734. 关于五识既不消散亦不停生之说,谓异议者不许,故说『经中……应当如此论。』
Tatiyasaññāvedayitakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 第三想受论的注释已结束。
10. Asaññasattupikākathāvaṇṇanā十、无想有情论注释
§735
735. Yathā vitakkavicārapītisukhavirāgavasena pavattā samāpatti vitakkādirahitā hoti, evaṃ saññāvirāgavasena pavattāpi saññārahitāva siyāti tassa laddhīti dassento āha ‘‘sāpi asaññitā…pe… dassetī’’ti.
735. 如同因思想观念、喜悦安乐及离欲而起的定境,定中无有分别等念,类似地依离欲分别而起的念,亦应视作无念境。对此之证明,称『此亦离念……其可见证』。
§736
736. Yadi catutthajjhānasamāpatti kathaṃ asaññasamāpattīti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘saññāvirāgavasena samāpannattā asaññitā, na saññāya abhāvato’’ti.
736. 若谈第四禅之定,如何说是无念定?答以标示性问句说:依离念而成之定,是无念之定,非无分别之定。
Asaññasattupikākathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 无想有情论的注释已结束。
11. Kammūpacayakathāvaṇṇanā十一、业积聚论注释
§738-739
738-739. ‘‘Kammūpacayo kammena sahajāto’’ti puṭṭho sampayuttasahajātataṃ sandhāya paṭikkhipati, vippayuttasahajātataṃ sandhāya paṭijānātīti. Vippayuttassapi hi atthi sahajātatā cittasamuṭṭhānarūpassa viyāti adhippāyo.
738-739. "业的增长由业生",此问针对业与其生起之关系而提出,断言与既生俱生者相关,承认与不俱生者之关系。即使无关联者,亦存在天生之特质,即心之显现变化,此即依止所指。
§741
741.Tiṇṇanti kammakammūpacayakammavipākānaṃ.
741. "通过三者完成业、业增长与业果报"。
Kammūpacayakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 业积聚论注释终了。
Pannarasamavaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 第十五品注释终了。
Tatiyo paṇṇāsako samatto. · 第三个五十集完成。
16. Soḷasamavaggo第十六品。
3. Sukhānuppadānakathāvaṇṇanā三、乐施与论注释。
§747-748
747-748.Na tassāti yassa taṃ anuppadissati, na tassa. Yo hi anuppadeti, yassa ca anuppadeti, tadubhayavinimuttā idha pareti adhippetā.
747-748.「不是所有的都不存在,亦非无一存在。实则,若有使其存在者,亦有被其存在者,二者皆得解脱,彼处彼岸被主宰。」
Sukhānuppadānakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 乐施与论注释终了。
4. Adhigayhamanasikārakathāvaṇṇanā四、证得作意论释
§749-753
749-753.Taṃcittatāyāti ettha manasikaronto yadi sabbasaṅkhāre ekato manasi karoti, yena cittena manasi karoti, sabbasaṅkhārantogadhattā tasmiṃyeva khaṇe taṃ cittaṃ manasi kātabbaṃ etassāti taṃcittatā nāma doso āpajjatīti dassento āha ‘‘tadeva ārammaṇabhūta’’ntiādi. Etena tasseva tena manasikaraṇāsambhavamāha, taṃ vātiādinā pana sasaṃvedanāvādāpattinti ayametesaṃ viseso.
749-753.「此称为心的统一者,谓于此处专注若能一心于一切行法,即以彼心意念专注,由诸行内住,于当时刻彼心当念。此所谓心的统一,因果中生彼种过患。言说时,于其文中说明曰:“此正是支缘所生”等。故此说法,乃说明彼时彼种心念无有发生之可能。又以‘影响感受之说’为彼二者之异特。」
Adhigayhamanasikārakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 证得作意论释毕。
Soḷasamavaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 第十六品释毕。
17. Sattarasamavaggo十七、第十七品
1. Atthiarahatopuññūpacayakathāvaṇṇanā一、有阿拉汉福德积集论释
§776-779
776-779.Kiriyacittaṃabyākataṃ anādiyitvāti ‘‘kiriyacittaṃ abyākata’’nti aggahetvā, dānādipavattanena dānamayādipuññattena ca gahetvāti attho.
776-779.“作业心未阐明未发起”,此句中谓“作业心未阐明”,意指先抓住施与等行为所导致的施财等功德之果报并承受之义。
Atthiarahatopuññūpacayakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 有阿拉汉福德积集论释毕。
2. Natthiarahatoakālamaccūtikathāvaṇṇanā二、关于“阿拉汉没有非时死”之论的注释
§780
780.Aladdhavipākavārānanti vipākadānaṃ pati aladdhokāsānaṃ. Byantībhāvanti vigatantataṃ, vigamaṃ avipākanti attho.
780.“无依果报根源”者,指果报所依赖之根本失去,无穷尽之意。谓衰退终止者为止灭无果报之说。
§781
781.Tato paranti byatirekena atthasiddhi, na kevalena anvayenāti āha ‘‘tāva na kamati, tato paraṃ kamatīti laddhiyā paṭikkhipatī’’ti. Tattha tato paranti pubbe katassa kammassa parikkhayagamanato paraṃ. Natthi pāṇātipāto pāṇātipātalakkhaṇābhāvatoti adhippāyo. Tameva lakkhaṇābhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘pāṇopāṇasaññitā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha na tenāti yo parena upakkamo kato , tena upakkamena na mato, dhammatāmaraṇeneva matoti dubbiññeyyaṃ avisesavidūhi, dubbiññeyyaṃ vā hotu suviññeyyaṃ vā, aṅgapāripūriyāva pāṇātipāto.
781.“继彼之后独特之得道”,非仅仅依循而已,故言“尚非止此,继之而后乃成”。意指彼处彼后为之前所造业果报之断绝而来。无“杀业”即无杀业特征,故称为定断。欲示杀业特征之无,故有“以命相系者”等说。此处否认“彼非之谓”,谓未经他杀而起,使其非谓者不被认可,为善法死亦不成,谓循环不断堪难分辨,非难辨亦非易辨,足以充斥诸肢,杀业是也。
Natthiarahatoakālamaccūtikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 关于“阿拉汉没有非时死”之论的注释终了。
3. Sabbamidaṃkammatotikathāvaṇṇanā三、关于“一切此皆由业而来”之论的注释
§784
784.Abījatoti sabbena sabbaṃ abījato aññabījato ca. Tanti deyyadhammaṃ, gilānapaccayanti attho.
784.“无种子”即一切无种子,有差别指为他种子。此说指示天界法,如疾病因缘等义。
Sabbamidaṃkammatotikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 关于“一切此皆由业而来”之论的注释终了。
4. Indriyabaddhakathāvaṇṇanā四、关于“系属于根者”之论的注释
§788
788.Vināpi aniccaṭṭhenāti aniccaṭṭhaṃ ṭhapetvāpi aṭṭhapetvāpīti attho, na aniccaṭṭhavirahenāti. Na hi aniccaṭṭhavirahitaṃ anindriyabaddhaṃ atthi.
788.『Vināpi aniccaṭṭhenāti』意为即使确立了无常之地,也只是确立了无常之地的意义,并非说没有无常之地的反面。因为不存在没有无常之地的、受根束缚的事物。
Indriyabaddhakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 关于“系属于根者”之论的注释终了。
7. Navattabbaṃsaṅghodakkhiṇaṃvisodhetītikathāvaṇṇanā7. 不应施与僧团之施净化之说明
§793-794
793-794.Appaṭiggahaṇatoti paṭiggāhakattābhāvato.
793-794.『不受取』者,谓无有受取者故也。
Navattabbaṃsaṅghodakkhiṇaṃvisodhetītikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 不应施与僧团之施净化之说明已毕。
11. Dakkhiṇāvisuddhikathāvaṇṇanā11. 施净化之说明
§800-801
800-801.Paṭiggāhakanirapekkhāti paṭiggāhakassa guṇavisesanirapekkhā, tassa dakkhiṇeyyabhāvena vināti attho. Tenāha ‘‘paṭiggāhakenapaccayabhūtena vinā’’ti. Saccametanti laddhikittanena vuttabhāvameva paṭijānāti. Paṭiggāhakassa vipākanibbattanaṃ dānacetanāya mahāphalatā. Paccayabhāvoyeva hi tassa, na tassā kāraṇattaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘dānacetanānibbattanena yadi bhaveyyā’’tiādi.
800-801.『Paṭiggāhakanirapekkhāti』意指无视持戒者的资质特征,因而以其所得果报为堕落的意思。因此称为“无持戒之因缘”。此果实乃由持戒因缘而生,此乃意义所在而非因果本体。因此说“若因于施意愿而生果”,其意即此。
Dakkhiṇāvisuddhikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 施净化之说明已毕。
Sattarasamavaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 第十七品之说明已毕。
18. Aṭṭhārasamavaggo18. 第十八品
1. Manussalokakathāvaṇṇanā一、人间界论注释
§802-803
802-803.Gahaṇanti micchāgahaṇaṃ.
802-803.『执取』者,即邪执取也。
Manussalokakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 人间界论注释终了。
2. Dhammadesanākathāvaṇṇanā二、说法论注释
§804-806
804-806.Tassa ca nimmitabuddhassa desanaṃ sampaṭicchitvā āyasmatā ānandena sayameva ca desito.
804-806.对那觉悟者的教诲获得同意后,具寿长老阿难即被称为阿难尊者授予正法。
Dhammadesanākathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 说法论注释终了。
6. Jhānasaṅkantikathāvaṇṇanā六、禅那转入论注释
§813-816
813-816. Vitakkavicāresu virattacittatā tattha ādīnavamanasikāro, tadākāro ca dutiyajjhānūpacāroti āha ‘‘vitakkavicārā ādīnavato manasi kātabbā, tato dutiyajjhānena bhavitabba’’nti.
813-816.在正念禅定的思惟中,有断除内忧的心态,此特征即是第二禅的随行作用。文中说:“思惟须臾为心所摄,继之以第二禅。”
Jhānasaṅkantikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 禅那转入论注释终了。
7. Jhānantarikakathāvaṇṇanā七、禅那间隔论注释
§817-819
817-819. Na paṭhamajjhānaṃ vitakkābhāvato, nāpi dutiyajjhānaṃ vicārasabbhāvatoti jhānametaṃ na hotīti dassento āha ‘‘paṭhamajjhānādīsu aññatarabhāvābhāvato na jhāna’’nti.
817-819. 第一道禅定因无思维,第二道禅定亦非由思惟所成,故此禅定不成立。对此有所显现,谓“在第一禅定等禅定中,由于有无某种特性,故不成禅定”。
Jhānantarikakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 禅那间隔论注释终了。
9. Cakkhunārūpaṃpassatītikathāvaṇṇanā九、「以眼见色」论注释
§826-827
826-827. ‘‘Cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā’’ti iminā cakkhuviññāṇena paṭijānanassa aggahaṇe aruciṃ sūcento āha ‘‘manoviññāṇapaṭijānanaṃ kira sandhāyā’’ti. Tenevāha ‘‘manoviññāṇapaṭijānanaṃ panā’’tiādi. Tasmāti manoviññāṇapaṭijānanasseva adhippetattāti attho. Evaṃ santeti yadi rūpena rūpaṃ paṭivijānāti, rūpaṃ paṭivijānantampi manoviññāṇaṃ rūpavijānanaṃ hoti, na rūpadassananti āha ‘‘manoviññāṇapaṭijānanaṃ pana rūpadassanaṃ kathaṃ hotī’’ti.
826-827. "眼见色",此中所谓以眼识观察,指明生起扬弃的厌倦时说:“意识认识是与境相持之识矣。”又言“意识认识亦如是”等。由此说明,只有所谓意识的认识具主导地位。若以色识识别色,则识色即为意识的色识,非色觉。故说“意识认识则色觉如何发生?”
Cakkhunārūpaṃpassatītikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 「以眼见色」论注释终了。
Aṭṭhārasamavaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 第十八品注释终了。
19. Ekūnavīsatimavaggo十九、第十九品
1. Kilesapajahanakathāvaṇṇanā一、随烦恼断说之阐释
§828-831
828-831.Te panāti ye ariyamaggena pahīnā kilesā, te pana. Kāmañcettha maggena pahātabbakilesā maggabhāvanāya asati uppajjanārahā khaṇattayaṃ na āgatāti ca anāgatā nāma siyuṃ, yasmā pana te na uppajjissanti, tasmā tathā na vuccantīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘nāpi bhavissantī’’ti.
828-831. “彼者”指在圣道上断除烦恼者。此者。欲有烦恼亦如是断除,因有欲故起烦恼,为断除道时须不生。此忽然未至,故称不至,谓不会再生,故不如实称为“将生”。依此应观不可生。于是说“彼等亦不生”。
Kilesapajahanakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 随烦恼断说之阐释已毕。
2. Suññatakathāvaṇṇanā二、空性说之阐释
§832
832. Yena avasavattanaṭṭhena paraparikappito natthi etesaṃ attano visayanti anattāti vuccanti sabhāvadhammā, svāyaṃ anattatāti āha ‘‘avasavattanākāro anattatā’’ti. Sā panāyaṃ yasmā atthato asārakatāva hoti, tasmā tadekadesena taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘atthato jarāmaraṇamevā’’ti āha. Evaṃ sati lakkhaṇasaṅkaro siyā, tesaṃ panidaṃ adhippāyakittananti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Arūpadhammānaṃ avasavattanākāratāya eva hi anattalakkhaṇassa saṅkhārakkhandhapariyāpannatā.
832. 由无常所缘察至转变,谓其自体非实有,故称诸法为无我。此说是因其实质不能自存,自性无我,称之为“无常之作无我”,且其无实用性,于一面显现为“实质上即老死”。于是作此记号堆集,谓其为凭依标识。色法诸无常的无我体正是由蕴集所表示。无色法无常之相亦然,因存在是无我之相。
Suññatakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 空性说之阐释已毕。
3. Sāmaññaphalakathāvaṇṇanā三、沙门果说之阐释
§835-836
835-836.Pattidhammanti heṭṭhā vuttaṃ samannāgamamāha.
835-836. 所谓缘法,下面已为述及,正是指所有因缘和合之法。
Sāmaññaphalakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 沙门果说之阐释已毕。
5. Tathatākathāvaṇṇanā5. 如性论之阐释
§841-843
841-843.Rūpādīnaṃ sabhāvatāti etena rūpādayo eva sabhāvatāti imamatthaṃ paṭikkhipati . Yato taṃ paravādī rūpādīsu apariyāpannaṃ icchati. Tenāha ‘‘bhāvaṃ hesa tathatāti vadati, na bhāvayoga’’nti. Tattha bhāvanti dhammamattaṃ, pakatīti attho ‘‘jātidhamma’’ntiādīsu viya. Rūpādīnañhi ruppanādipakati tathā asaṅkhatāti ca paravādino laddhi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘na bhāvayoga’’nti. Yena hi bhāvo sabhāvadhammo yujjati, ekībhāvameva gacchati, taṃ ruppanādilakkhaṇaṃ bhāvayogo. Taṃ pana rūpādito anaññaṃ, tato eva saṅkhataṃ, aviparītaṭṭhena pana ‘‘tatha’’nti vuccati.
841-843. 色等之存在性,即以色等为存在,不可反对之意。因反对者欲将其视为非存在,不终足故。故说“存在即是如实”,非造作之存。此处存在意谓法之真实存在,如生者诸法。如色等在色法之首,亦是非无为法。故谓“非造作之存在”。存在是与存在性结连,成为统一存在,此即色等之存在联系。色等之外无他,故是行法,并以不变异性称为“如是”。
Tathatākathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 如性论之阐释已毕。
6. Kusalakathāvaṇṇanā6. 善论之阐释
§844-846
844-846. Anavajjabhāvamatteneva kusalanti yojanā. Tasmāti yasmā avajjarahitaṃ anavajjaṃ, anavajjabhāvamatteneva ca kusalaṃ, tasmā nibbānaṃ kusalanti.
844-846。因无过失之性本自具足,故称为善。由此由于无退失及无过失之性本自具足,又称为善,故涅槃亦为善。
Kusalakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 善论之阐释已毕。
7. Accantaniyāmakathāvaṇṇanā7. 决定论之阐释
§847
847. Yaṃ ‘‘ekavāraṃ nimuggo tathā nimuggova hoti, etassa puna bhavato vuṭṭhānaṃ nāma natthī’’ti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ āgataṃ, so pana ācariyavādo, na aṭṭhakathānayoti dassento ‘‘tāya jātiyā…pe… maññamāno’’ti āha. Tattha tāya jātiyāti yassaṃ jātiyaṃ puggalo kammāvaraṇādiāvaraṇehi samannāgato hoti, tāya jātiyā. Saṃsārakhāṇukabhāvo vassabhaññādīnaṃ viya makkhaliādīnaṃ viya ca daṭṭhabbo. So ca ahetukādimicchādassanassa phalabhāveneva veditabbo, na accantaniyāmassa nāma kassaci atthibhāvato. Yathā hi vimuccantassa koci niyāmo nāma natthi ṭhapetvā maggena bhavaparicchedaṃ, evaṃ avimuccantassapi koci saṃsāraniyāmo nāma natthi. Tādisassa pana micchādassanassa balavabhāve aparimitakappaparicchede cirataraṃ saṃsārappabandho hoti, apāyūpapatti ca yattha saṃsārakhāṇusamaññā.
847。有云“只沉降一次,确实会沉降;对此无复生之说”,此为注疏所述之义。然师长论说并非仅止于此,开示曰:“由此生命……自以为是”等语。所云“由此生命”,谓人因生命与业障等障碍相摄,称为“由此生命”。如同轮回之沙漏流转,及为毒蛇等有毒生物所观察之理。此亦应以无因之邪见之果报而言,不应指某一特定因缘之名称。如确实生者无任何统制与节制,投身于道茎以示分断生命,如是未脱者亦无轮回之统制名。然此邪见因其强大之实力,无量劫轮回束缚,及堕落地狱之现状,应与轮回之沙漏、毒蛇等同类。故称为“由此生命”。
Yaṃ paneke vadanti ‘‘attheva accantaṃ saṃsaritā anantattā sattanikāyassā’’ti, tampi apuññabahulaṃ sattasantānaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ siyā. Na hi mātughātakādīnaṃ tenattabhāvena sammattaniyāmokkamanantarāyabhūto micchattaniyāmo viya sattānaṃ vimuttantarāyakaro saṃsāraniyāmo nāma natthi. Yāva pana na maggaphalassa upanissayo upalabbhati, tāva saṃsāro aparicchinno. Yadā ca so upaladdho, tadā so paricchinno evāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
又有人云“生生俱无穷,众生无限”,此或许指聚集众多非善行之众生。因非婚杀等之业,故非正确之统制障碍之恶见及其统制者名轮回统制,断除解脱者之障碍不生,非共现之错统制不作轮回统制。唯至无漏道果未证得前,轮回犹未了然;得证后,轮回才称为了然。
Yathā niyatasammādassanaṃ, evaṃ niyatamicchādassanenapi savisaye ekaṃsagāhavasena ukkaṃsagatena bhavitabbanti tena samannāgatassa puggalassa sati accantaniyāme kathaṃ tasmiṃ abhinivesavisaye anekaṃsagāho uppajjeyya, abhinivesantaraṃ vā viruddhaṃ yadi uppajjeyya, accantaniyāmo eva na siyāti pāḷiyaṃ vicikicchuppattiniyāmantaruppatticodanā katā. Na hi vicikicchā viya sammattaniyatapuggalānaṃ yathākkamaṃ micchattasammattaniyatapuggalānaṃ sammattamicchattaniyatā dhammā kadācipi uppajjanti, aviruddhaṃ pana niyāmantarameva hotīti ānantarikantaraṃ viya micchādassanantaraṃ samānajātikaṃ na nivattetīti viruddhaṃyeva dassetuṃ pāḷiyaṃ vicikicchā viya sassatucchedadiṭṭhiyo eva uddhaṭā. Evamettha vicikicchuppattiniyāmantaruppattīnaṃ niyāmantaruppattinivattakabhāvo veditabbo, accantaniyāmo ca nivattissatīti ca viruddhametanti pana ‘‘vicāretvāva gahetabbā’’ti vuttaṃ siyā.
如对确实正见,应当以专注细究;同样对恒常邪见,亦应专注深入观察。以此具足之人,如何在执著境遇生多所执?若生习气相违之执,则无确切统制,谓之巴利语中‘疑生律仪之相违’。如疑障碍,正确定见之圣者不适行为应作转,亦非错误定见者作正确定见之诸法生起,故无冲突之律仪。此处疑产生律仪之相违、律仪生起与消退之关系应当明了。正确统制必当回归,故取舍需谨慎考虑。
Accantaniyāmakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 决定论之阐释已毕。
8. Indriyakathāvaṇṇanā8. 根论之解释
§853-856
853-856. Yathā lokuttarā saddhādayo eva saddhindriyādīni, evaṃ lokiyāpi. Kasmā ? Tatthāpi adhimokkhalakkhaṇādinā indaṭṭhasabbhāvato. Saddheyyādivatthūsu saddahanādimattameva hi tanti imamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘lokuttarānaṃ…pe… daṭṭhabbo’’ti.
853-856。如越世间之信等信根等内在作用,世间亦然。何以故?因其中有以尽断之特征等自然义。对此信等等以微量坚固为限,故教示“越世间者……应当观察”等文。
Indriyakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 根论之解释已毕。
Ekūnavīsatimavaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 第十九品之解释已毕。
20. Vīsatimavaggo20. 第二十品
2. Ñāṇakathāvaṇṇanā2. 智论之解释
§863-865
863-865. Kāmaṃ pubbabhāgepi attheva dukkhapariññā, atthasādhikā pana sā maggakkhaṇikā evāti ukkaṃsagataṃ dukkhapariññaṃ sandhāya avadhārento āha ‘‘dukkhaṃ…pe… maggañāṇameva dīpetī’’ti. Taṃ pana avadhāraṇaṃ na ñāṇantaranivattanaṃ, atha kho ñāṇantarassa yathādhigatakiccanivattanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘na tasseva ñāṇabhāva’’ntiādi.
863-865。欲乐在过往生亦属痛苦认知,尽用意义上只是道之瞬间,即专注于痛苦认知,论述谓“痛苦……唯由道智照亮”。此痛苦认知非智知连转之转变,之后则视为智已得之相关活动,故言“并非该智之性”等。
Ñāṇakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 智论之解释已毕。
3. Nirayapālakathāvaṇṇanā3. 地狱守卫论释
§866-868
866-868. Nerayike niraye pālenti, tato niggantuṃ appadānavasena rakkhantīti nirayapālā. Nirayapālatāya vā nerayikānaṃ narakadukkhena pariyonaddhāya alaṃ samatthāti nirayapālā. Kiṃ panete nirayapālā nerayikā, udāhu anerayikāti. Kiñcettha – yadi tāva nerayikā, nirayasaṃvattaniyena kammena nibbattāti sayampi nirayadukkhaṃ paccanubhaveyyuṃ, tathā sati aññesaṃ nerayikānaṃ yātanāya asamatthā siyuṃ, ‘‘ime nerayikā, ime nirayapālā’’ti vavatthānañca na siyā. Ye ca ye yātenti, tehi samānarūpabalappamāṇehi itaresaṃ bhayasantāsā na siyuṃ. Atha anerayikā, tesaṃ tattha kathaṃ sambhavoti? Vuccate – anerayikā nirayapālā anirayagatisaṃvattaniyakammanibbattā. Nirayūpapattisaṃvattaniyakammato hi aññeneva kammunā te nibbattanti rakkhasajātikattā. Tathā hi vadanti –
866-868。堕于地狱者堕入地狱,继而因如同恶鬼缠绕般加以守护者,称为地狱守护者。由于地狱守护者以保护地狱众生不受地狱苦难所困扰为名,为地狱众生脱离痛苦周旋,应当说其能力有限而不完备。何谓地狱守护者?亦即地狱众生。实际上有些只是非地狱者。由此言之:若该众生尚为地狱众生,必因业力支配而业报产生,我们同样将亲受地狱痛苦,因而对他人所受地狱苦痛难以承担,故不能言“这是地狱众生,这是地狱守护者”;言行解释亦不可确立。那些受苦者种种,依其类似痛苦的程度,在众中并无恐惧与惶恐。对于非地狱者者,其堕于此地如何成立?答曰:非地狱者是因地狱守护者的非地狱往所致之业力而感得。这些众生乃由另一业力——如守护鬼神之业力——所生,因而形成此状。诸说如是,
‘‘Kodhanā kurūrakammantā, pāpābhirucino tathā;
“以忿怒行残暴恶业,随恶趣所趣向;
Dukkhitesu ca nandanti, jāyanti yamarakkhasā’’ti.
于苦痛中欢喜者,乃由阎罗守护众生所化。”
Tattha yadeke vadanti ‘‘yātanādukkhassa appaṭisaṃvedanato, aññathā puna aññamaññaṃ yāteyyu’’nti ca evamādi, tayidaṃ ākāsaromaṭṭhanaṃ nirayapālānaṃ nerayikabhāvasseva abhāvato. Ye pana vadeyyuṃ – yadipi anerayikā nirayapālā, ayomayāya pana ādittāya sampajjalitāya sajotibhūtāya nirayabhūmiyā parivattamānā kathaṃ nāma dukkhaṃ nānubhavantīti? Kammānubhāvato. Yathā hi iddhimanto cetovasippattā mahāmoggallānādayo nerayike anukampantā iddhibalena nirayabhūmiṃ upagatā tattha dāhadukkhena na bādhīyanti, evaṃ sampadamidaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
其中有谓“一方虽未亲感受痛苦,彼此却能往来”,亦有此类,如此者成就若空中之毛发者,犹如地狱守护者无实质地狱之状态。然若有人说“虽然非地狱守护者,彼因无形火焰燃烧于净净地狱处而转动,何以能称痛苦无有?”是业报所致。如通灵禅定具足者摩诃马哈摩嘎喇那等,出于神通悲悯心,于地狱游行时不为熊熊火处之痛所扰,然此等事应理当了知。
Taṃ iddhivisayassa acinteyyabhāvatoti ce? Idampi taṃsamānaṃ kammavipākassa acinteyyabhāvato. Tathārūpena hi kammunā te nibbattā yathā nirayadukkhena abādhitā eva hutvā nerayike yātenti, na cettakena bāhiravisayābhāvo vijjati iṭṭhāniṭṭhatāya paccekaṃ dvārapurisesu vibhattasabhāvattā. Tathā hi ekaccassa dvārassa purisassa iṭṭhaṃ ekaccassa aniṭṭhaṃ, ekaccassa ca aniṭṭhaṃ ekaccassa iṭṭhaṃ hoti. Evañca katvā yadeke vadanti ‘‘natthi kammavasena tejasā parūpatāpana’’ntiādi, tadapāhataṃ hoti. Yaṃ pana vadanti ‘‘anerayikānaṃ tesaṃ kathaṃ tattha sambhavo’’ti nerayikānaṃ yātakabhāvato. Nerayikasattayātanāyoggañhi attabhāvaṃ nibbattentaṃ kammaṃ tādisanikantivināmitaṃ nirayaṭṭhāneyeva nibbatteti. Te ca nerayikehi adhikatarabalārohapariṇāhā ativiya bhayānakasantāsakurūratarapayogā ca honti. Eteneva tattha kākasunakhādīnampi nibbatti saṃvaṇṇitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
若问此事难思,则此亦因共同业报之难思。故如是因业而生者,虽未被地狱之苦所苦扰,亦得于地狱中往来,无感知其外境缺失,乃因各人喜恶不同及住处互异。譬如一门之中,有所喜欢,有所厌恶;一处厌恶他处喜欢。于是有人说“无因业力而受他处火烧之苦”,此说则被破除。至于谓“非地狱者,其本何以能行此?”此因地狱苦报之生。因地狱众生痛苦处所业力,且因无礼之行为,必感于地狱之所生。此等堕地狱者,具极强大力,能登高处,且其意念恐怖异常,使其如乌鸦食秽者般亦得所生者,理应当知。
Kathamaññagatikehi aññagatikabādhananti ca na vattabbaṃ aññatthāpi tathā dassanato. Yaṃ paneke vadanti ‘‘asattasabhāvā nirayapālā nirayasunakhādayo cā’’ti, taṃ tesaṃ matimattaṃ aññattha tathā adassanato. Na hi kāci atthi tādisī dhammappavatti, yā asattasabhāvā, sampatisattehi appayojitā ca atthakiccaṃ sādhentī diṭṭhapubbā. Petānaṃ pānīyanivārakānaṃ daṇḍādihatthapurisānampi asattabhāve visesakāraṇaṃ natthi. Supinūpaghātopi atthakiccasamatthatāya appamāṇaṃ dassanādimattenapi tadatthasiddhito. Tathā hi supine āhārūpabhogādinā na atthasiddhi atthi, nimmānarūpaṃ panettha laddhaparihāraṃ iddhivisayassa acinteyyabhāvato. Idhāpi kammavipākassa acinteyyabhāvatoti ce? Taṃ na, asiddhattā. Nerayikānaṃ kammavipāko nirayapālāti asiddhametaṃ, vuttanayena pana nesaṃ sattabhāvo eva siddho. Sakkā hi vattuṃ sattasaṅkhātā nirayapālasaññitā dhammappavatti sābhisandhikā parūpaghāti atthakiccasabbhāvato ojāhārādirakkhasasantati viyāti. Abhisandhipubbakatā cettha na sakkā paṭikkhipituṃ tathā tathā abhisandhiyā yātanato, tato eva na saṅghāṭapabbatādīhi anekantikatā. Ye pana vadanti ‘‘bhūtavisesā eva te vaṇṇasaṇṭhānādivisesavanto bheravākārā narakapālāti samaññaṃ labhantī’’ti, tadasiddhaṃ. Ujukameva pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘atthi niraye nirayapālā’’ti vādassa patiṭṭhāpitattā.
所谓某些异趣及坏趣禁止不能说有别的解说。若有人说“非实体者乃地狱守护者及地狱食秽者”等,此乃其一己之见,非他证实。实无此类现象,即非实体者既无饥渴之类属性,又不依赖诸色法,亦无可成就行。鬼道众中因阻断饮料和食粮不得条件,无手段承事侵害以致为非实体者者亦无存在。即使鬼神幽梦缠身,对其无能为力者,亦证其行不可成。又因幻觉诸饮食无能成理,幻形亦无所依止,故此类非实体存有因业报难思。若言业报难思,则不正确。地狱众生因业力而受地狱守护之称者虽难思,然众生之身及存在状态确定无疑。确实世间广说地狱守护者为守护诸众生,为保卫并防止敌人侵害。其前因由大力守护所致,故未绝无继。乃至非生地狱的多个聚居之地,人们亦称为地狱守护者。又有人说“诸色之特殊体、含色之处等特殊体但具恐怖形态,即为地狱守护者”,此说成立。故本尊所承传经文有云“地狱确有地狱守护者”一说得以确立。
Apica yathā ariyavinaye narakapālānaṃ bhūtamattatā asiddhā, tathā paññattimattavādinopi tesaṃ bhūtamattatā asiddhāva. Na hi tassa bhūtāni nāma santi. Yadi paramatthaṃ gahetvā voharati, atha kasmā vedanādike eva paṭikkhipatīti? Tiṭṭhatesā anavaṭṭhitatakkānaṃ appahīnasammohavipallāsānaṃ vādavīmaṃsā, evaṃ attheva nirayapālāti niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṃ. Sati ca nesaṃ sabbhāve, asatipi bāhire visaye narake viya desādiniyamo hotīti vādo na sijjhati evāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
此外,如同圣教戒律中关于地狱守护众生存在本体的真实性不成立一般,依照形相论见者所说,这些地狱守护众生具有的存在本体也同样不成立。因为那些存在本体根本不存在。如果该者执持最高真实而修行,何以还针对受受等而生反对呢?地狱守护众生的存在仅是非真实的,并且是由不安立的沉迷错乱所产生的辩论审察,这里必须理解的就是如此,因此最终必当前往地狱。且须知在它们的本性中,实无存在;反倒是其为非存在者,由于处于外境如地狱等,故有因地制宜的说法,不应终止此辩论论述。
Nirayapālakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 地狱守卫论释毕。
4. Tiracchānakathāvaṇṇanā4. 畜生论释
§869-871
869-871.Tassāti erāvaṇanāmakassa devaputtassa. Tahiṃ kīḷanakāle hatthivaṇṇena vikubbanaṃ sandhāya ‘‘hatthināgassā’’ti vuttaṃ. Dibbayānassāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Na hi ekantasukhappaccayaṭṭhāne sagge dukkhādhiṭṭhānassa akusalakammasamuṭṭhānassa attabhāvassa sambhavo yutto. Tenāha ‘‘na tiracchānagatassā’’ti.
869-871.「Tassāti」指的是名为「若罗闼」的天子。在那里玩耍时,他用象鼻卷绕并称之为『象蛇』。『天眼力』此处也是同样的道理。因为决定由纯粹的快乐缘起,天界不可能产生基于痛苦断灭的不善业之自体缘起。因此佛言『无畜生道者』。
Tiracchānakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 畜生论释毕。
6. Ñāṇakathāvaṇṇanā6. 智论释
§876-877
876-877. ‘‘Dvādasavatthukaṃ ñāṇaṃ lokuttara’’nti ettha dvādasavatthukassa ñāṇassa lokuttaratā patiṭṭhāpīyatīti dassento paṭhamavikappaṃ vatvā puna lokuttarañāṇassa dvādasavatthukatā patiṭṭhāpīyatīti dassetuṃ ‘‘taṃ vā…pe… attho’’ti āha. Pariññeyyanti ettha iti-saddo ādiattho, pakārattho vā. Tena ‘‘pahātabba’’nti evamādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Pariññātanti etthāpi eseva nayo. ‘‘Pariññeyyaṃ pariññāta’’ntiādinā parijānanādikiriyāya nibbattetabbatā nibbattitatā ca dassitā, na nibbattiyamānatāti. Yena pana sā hoti, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘saccañāṇaṃ panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha saccañāṇanti dukkhādisaccasabhāvāvabodhakaṃ ñāṇaṃ, yaṃ sandhāya ‘‘idaṃ dukkha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Maggakkhaṇepīti api-saddena tato pubbāparabhāgepīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Parijānanādikiccasādhanavasena hoti asammohato visayato cāti adhippāyo.
876-877. 「十二支知识为出世间」这里意在阐释十二支知识之出世间属性,表明其建立为出世间之“根基”,为使其显现初步所作说明。又为进一步显明出世间知识十二支之落实,故复言其边支成立。于是说『此义……』。此处『应了知』一词为前文意味或指示含义,以此综摄『应当放弃』等教义条款。『应了知』此处义则同上。所谓『应了知,应已了知』是指为了知见过程及其灭尽,应了知及已了知的作用体现,不是指灭尽本身。由此而有『真实智慧』的说法,见于『真实智慧等』的经典所述。这里所说的真实智慧,是指通达苦等真谛本质的智慧,故依次说『这是苦』等。关于道集灭的时刻即具乘意义,应理解为时间先后顺序。知见过程属于具备认知等条件的行使范畴,故称为内在对境。
Ñāṇakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 智论释毕。
Vīsatimavaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 第二十品的注释完毕。
Catuttho paṇṇāsako samatto. · 第四个五十集完毕。
21. Ekavīsatimavaggo二十一、第二十一品
1. Sāsanakathāvaṇṇanā一、教法论注释
§878
878.Samudāyāti ‘‘sāsanaṃ navaṃ kata’’ntiādinā pucchāvasena pavattā vacanasamudāyā. Ekadesānanti tadavayavānaṃ. ‘‘Tīsupi pucchāsū’’ti evaṃ adhikaraṇabhāvena vuttā.
878. 「集」即以「教法新立」等为问句所产生的语句聚集。这里『十一问』指构成其部分内容。『三问』二谛主题的情形,依句法成分予以说明。
Sāsanakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 教法论注释完毕。
4. Iddhikathāvaṇṇanā四、神通论注释
§883-884
883-884.Adhippāyavasenāti tathā tathā adhimuccanādhippāyavasena.
883-884.『依止作用』指依止而得到完全解脱之依止作用。
Iddhikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 神通论释已竟。
7. Dhammakathāvaṇṇanā第七,法论释。
§887-888
887-888. Rūpasabhāvo rūpaṭṭhoti āha ‘‘rūpaṭṭho nāma koci rūpato añño natthī’’ti. Yaṃ pana yato aññaṃ, na taṃ taṃsabhāvanti āha ‘‘rūpaṭṭhato aññaṃ rūpañca na hotī’’ti, rūpameva na hotīti attho. Etena byatirekato tamatthaṃ sādheti. Tasmāti yasmā rūpato añño rūpaṭṭho natthi, rūpaṭṭhato ca aññaṃ rūpaṃ, tasmā rūpaṃ rūpameva rūpasabhāvamevāti eva-kārena nivattitaṃ dasseti ‘‘na vedanādisabhāva’’nti. Adhippāyenāti rūparūpaṭṭhānaṃ anaññattādhippāyena. Aññathāti tesaṃ aññatte rūpaṭṭhena niyamena rūpaṃ niyatanti vattabbanti yojanā. Dassitoyeva hoti atthato āpannattā. Na hi abhinne vatthusmiṃ pariyāyantarabhedaṃ karoti. Aññattanti rūpasabhāvānaṃ rūparūpaṭṭhānañca. Sasāminiddesasiddhābhedā ‘‘silāputtakassa sarīra’’nti viya, kappanāmattato cāyaṃ bhedo, na paramatthatoti āha ‘‘gahetvā viya pavatto’’ti. Vedanādīhi nānattamevāti vedanādīhi aññattameva. So sabhāvoti so rūpasabhāvo. Nānattasaññāpanatthanti rūpassa sabhāvo, na vedanādīnanti evaṃ bhedassa ñāpanatthaṃ. Tañca vacananti ‘‘rūpaṃ rūpaṭṭhena na niyata’’nti vacanaṃ. Vuttappakārenāti ‘‘rūpaṭṭhato aññassa rūpassa abhāvā’’tiādinā vuttākārena. Yadi sadosaṃ, atha kasmā paṭijānātīti yojanā.
887-888. 关于色法之本质,文本云「色本无他色」。所谓他色指的是依他色而成,故说「若存在他色,则色相不能成立」,其义在于对此进行反面论证。因此指出,因为没有色的他色,也没有他色的色,故色即是色法本质。『依止作用』指色法与色法之依止不一一对应。所谓差异,即说它们的差异规则指由色法与色的功能配合关系决定。此处所显之理即为其义,表明并不存在同一法中有差异性与转换性的矛盾。所谓差异,是指色法与色法本体之间的差异。其差异就如「石芽身体」般,名相是人为区分而非本质,故说『如拿取而运行动作』。受等不一则意为受等于差别性。是为彰显色法本质。差异论述中有说「色不依他色而定」的陈述,其依据是之前所说「色无他色」,所以依止作用是一种不一致依止关系。若有同声,何故拒斥呢?这里缘故在于区分。
Vuttameva kāraṇanti ‘‘rūpaṃ rūpameva, na vedanādisabhāva’’nti evaṃ vuttameva yuttiṃ. Parena coditanti ‘‘na vattabbaṃ rūpaṃ rūpaṭṭhena niyata’’ntiādinā paravādino codanaṃ sandhāyāha. Tameva kāraṇaṃ dassetvāti tameva yathāvuttaṃ yuttiṃ ‘‘ettha hī’’tiādinā dassetvā. Codanaṃ nivattetīti ‘‘atha kasmā paṭijānātī’’ti vuttaṃ codanaṃ nivatteti. Yamatthaṃ sandhāya ‘‘ito aññathā’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘rūpādī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
如所说的原因是:“色即是色,非受等性质”,此理说得恰当无误。有人反问说:“不可认为色乃依色而固定存在”等语,此为对立之辩者的质问。为示现此因故,应如所说的理义,借用“在这一处”等语言予以说明。问答中止即是“那么为何承认呢?”此问答亦止于此。若为追究实情,说“此处有他别法”,当以“色及外”等语证明之。
Dhammakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 法论释已竟。
Ekavīsatimavaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 第二十一品释已竟。
22. Bāvīsatimavaggo第二十二品。
2. Kusalacittakathāvaṇṇanā第二,善心论释。
§894-895
894-895.Purimajavanakkhaṇeti parinibbānacittato anantarātītapurimajavanavārakkhaṇe.
894-895。“前现世观察”者,即指断灭心起后紧接着的前现世察观阶段。
Kusalacittakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 善心论释注已毕。
3. Āneñjakathāvaṇṇanā三、不动论释注
§896
896. Hetusarūpārammaṇasampayuttadhammārammaṇādito bhavaṅgasadisattā cuticittaṃ ‘‘bhavaṅgacitta’’nti āha.
896。“因缘色相及法相相应诸法”的义理中,指同一有情之身心俱灭时最后一念心,谓之“因缘心”。
Āneñjakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 不动论释注已毕。
5-7. Tissopikathāvaṇṇanā五至七、三增上论释注
§898-900
898-900. Arahattappattipi gabbheyeva atthīti maññati. Sattavassikā hi sopākasāmaṇerādayo arahattaṃ pattā. Sattavassikopi gabbho atthīti paravādino adhippāyo. Ākāsena gacchanto viya supinaṃ ākāsasupinaṃ. Taṃ abhiññānibbattaṃ maññatīti nidassanaṃ katvā dassento āha ‘‘ākāsagamanādiabhiññā viyā’’ti. Heṭṭhimānaṃ catunnaṃ vā maggānaṃ adhigamena dhammābhisamayo aggaphalādhigamena arahattappatti ca supine atthīti maññatīti yojanā.
898-900。即使获阿拉汉果,也认为如在胎内一般而已。七年为体,诸沙玛内拉等修出阿拉汉果;敌人以七年胎期为准。谓如行空中者如同空中睡眠一样,故称此为依三明所证觉知:“如空行等诸三明。”修习走四道之下者,得法会入而获第一果,继而得阿拉汉果,如同睡眠中之体会,如此理解为方便诀。这里尺寸为比喻,以表达此义理。
Tissopikathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 三增上论释注已毕。
9. Āsevanapaccayakathāvaṇṇanā九、习行缘论释注
§903-905
903-905.Bījaṃ catumadhurabhāvaṃ na gaṇhātīti idaṃ sakasamayavasena vuttaṃ, parasamaye pana rūpadhammāpi arūpadhammehi samānakkhaṇā eva icchitā. Tenevāha ‘‘sabbe dhammā khaṇikā’’ti. Khaṇikattepi vā acetanesupi anindriyabaddharūpesu bhāvanāviseso labbhati, kimaṅgaṃ pana sacetanesūti dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā bījaṃ catumadhurabhāvaṃ na gaṇhātī’’ti nidassananti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Āsevento nāma koci dhammo natthi ittaratāya anavaṭṭhānatoti adhippāyo. Ittarakhaṇatāya eva pana āsevanaṃ labbhati. Kusalādibhāvena hi attasadisassa payogena karaṇīyassa punappunaṃ karaṇappavattanaṃ attasadisatāpādanaṃ vāsanaṃ vā āsevanaṃ pure paricitagantho viya pacchimassāti.
903-905。若种子因四种甘甜之味而不被摄取,此为同时段经说;但对于他时,色法亦欲同无色法一起转变。基于此义说“诸法是刹那生灭的”。纵使在刹那中无心法,也在无根色法中获得修习之殊胜,不同于有意识法。欲望者无真正法性,故此说法。只是对他性所取而欲所引,此处以“如种子不取四甘味”为例,令须观察明了。所谓欲生,实无自性,唯于相似取用法上,反复从事而成气味。此如过去所结之习气,令今后之修习恒恒起用,是故称为欲所伏。
Āsevanapaccayakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 习行缘论注释已结束。
10. Khaṇikakathāvaṇṇanā十、刹那论注释
§906-907
906-907.Pathaviyādirūpesūti anekakalāpasamudāyabhūtesu sasambhārapathavīādirūpesu. Tattha hi kesuci purimuppannesu ṭhitesu kesañci tadaññesaṃ uppādo, tato purimantaruppannānaṃ kesañci nirodho hoti ekekakalāparūpesu samānuppādanirodhattā tesaṃ. Evaṃ patiṭṭhānanti evaṃ vuttappakārena asamānuppādanirodhena pabandhena patiṭṭhānapavattīti attho. Sā panāyaṃ yathāvuttā pavatti kasmā rūpasantatiyā evāti āha ‘‘na hi rūpāna’’ntiādi. Tassattho – yadi sabbe saṅkhatadhammā samānakkhaṇā, tathā sati arūpasantatiyā viya rūpasantatiyāpi anantarādipaccayena vidhinā pavatti siyā, na cetaṃ atthi. Yadi siyā, cittakkhaṇe cittakkhaṇe pathavīādīnaṃ uppādanirodhehi bhavitabbanti.
906-907。所谓由地等色形成的无数种合成群聚色物中,有发起之尘埃,在旧起尘埃中立着,有所起尘埃然,其余旧起尘埃即灭。在诸个别色中同该起灭故成立如是,此即称为根本及其连带成住之义。如此依教理成立,何故说色族不断流转乎?此理—若诸有为法皆为刹那生死,则色族如无色族般,由先后因缘相续而随顺法则转变,此义是有的。若无此义,则须于每心识刹那刹那分别地等色的生灭来考虑。
Khaṇikakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 刹那论注释已结束。
Bāvīsatimavaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 第二十二品注释已结束。
23. Tevīsatimavaggo二十三、第二十三品
1. Ekādhippāyakathāvaṇṇanā一、一意趣论注释
§908
908.Eka-saddo aññatthopi hoti ‘‘ittheke abhivadantī’’tiādīsu viya, aññattañcettha rāgādhippāyato veditabbaṃ, puthujjanassa pana sachandarāgaparibhogabhāvato āha ‘‘rāgādhippāyato aññādhippāyovāti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Ko pana so aññādhippāyoti? Karuṇādhippāyo. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘karuṇādhippāyena ekādhippāyo’’ti. Ayañca nayo itthiyā jīvitarakkhaṇatthaṃ kāruññena manorathaṃ pūrentassa bodhisattassa saṃvaravināso na hotīti evaṃvādinaṃ paravādiṃ sandhāya vutto, paṇidhānādhippāyavādinaṃ pana sandhāya ‘‘eko adhippāyoti etthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Puttamukhadassanādhippāyopi ettheva saṅgahaṃ gatoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ekatobhāveti sahabhāve.
908. 单一的含义也可以会有其他不同的意义,就好像『在此称女比库为女比库』等句中,有时应了解为某种特殊之义;但凡夫因染著欲欲的执持,则说是“由欲着为主”的另一种执持。什么是“另一种执持”?是慈大执持。正因如此,才说“以慈为主要执持”。这就是因行女比库为护生命者,以慈心充满其心愿,故没有放逸精进的毁坏。对于持此说者,用以反驳他人,称之为有他执持;对于主张专一护愿者,则说“此处是一种总执持”等。以“以子面见”作为执持的说法也在此集中,应当观察。“单一发生”即共生,此义应知。
Ekādhippāyakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 一义论之解释已毕。
3-7. Issariyakāmakārikākathāvaṇṇanā3-7. 欲求自在论之解释
§910-914
910-914.Issariyenāti cittissariyena, na cetovasibhāvenāti attho. Kāmakārikaṃ yathicchitanipphādanaṃ. Issariyakāmakārikāhetūti issariyakāmakāribhāvanimittaṃ, tassa nibbattanatthanti attho. Micchādiṭṭhiyā karīyatīti micchābhiniveseneva yā kāci dukkarakārikā karīyatīti attho.
910-914.“执政者”意指心的主宰,而非指心的本性。意谓随意实施欲望的所作所为。因“执政者是欲行家”的因缘,即此为“执政者欲行”的表象,所以意指事情得以止息、熄灭。因错误见执,应当作此错误执着,不论何事但凡难行者,此义所指亦是如此。
Issariyakāmakārikākathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 欲求自在论之解释已毕。
8. Patirūpakathāvaṇṇanā8. 相似论之解释
§915-916
915-916.Mettādayo viyāti yathā mettā karuṇā muditā ca sinehasabhāvāpi arañjanasabhāvattā asaṃkiliṭṭhattā ca na rāgo, evaṃ rāgapatirūpako koci dhammo natthi ṭhapetvā mettādayo, aññacittassa siniyhanākāro rāgasseva pavattiākāroti attho. Tenevāha ‘‘rāgameva gaṇhātī’’ti. Evaṃ dosepīti ettha issādayo viya na doso dosapatirūpako koci atthīti dosameva gaṇhātīti yojetabbaṃ. Ṭhapetvā hi issādayo aññacittassa dussanākāro dosasseva pavattiākāroti.
915-916.“慈等诸法”即慈、悲、喜、舍四种善根的性质同沙他性、无杂染且非贪著之心。如此则无任何以贪为主的法可依存于慈等。慈等诸法虽表现为平等之心,却如他心痛苦之涵摄者,类似于欲爱之流行者,故说“以贪为作主”。故欲即“毒”之类同,此处“毒”并非负面责任人,而是毒害的主因无他义,即欲即毒,直接归于“毒”的统摄。因为欲为他心恶观之主因,如此解释。
Patirūpakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 相似论之解释已毕。
9. Aparinipphannakathāvaṇṇanā9. 未圆满论之解释
§917-918
917-918.Aniccādikobhāvoti aniccasaṅkhārapaṭiccasamuppannatādiko bhāvo dhammo pakati etassāti attho. Dukkhaññeva parinipphannanti ‘‘dukkhasaccaṃ sandhāya pucchā katā, na dukkhatāmatta’’nti ayamattho viññāyati ‘‘na kevalañhi paṭhamasaccameva dukkha’’nti vacanena. Tathā sati paravādinā cakkhāyatanādīnaṃ aññesañca taṃsarikkhakānaṃ dhammānaṃ parinipphannatā nānujānitabbā siyā. Kasmā? Tesampi hi dukkhasaccena saṅgaho, na itarasaccehi. Yañhi samudayasaccato nibbattaṃ, taṃ nippariyāyato dukkhasaccaṃ , itaraṃ saṅkhāradukkhatāya dukkhanti imamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘na kevalañhī’’tiādimāha. Tattha na hi anupādinnānīti iminā cakkhāyatanādīnaṃ samudayasaccena saṅgahābhāvamāha. Lokuttarānīti iminā nirodhamaggasaccehi. Yadi evamettha yutti vattabbā, kimettha vattabbaṃ? Sabhāvo hesa paravādivādassa, yadidaṃ pubbenāparamasaṃsandanaṃ. Tathā hi so viññūhi paṭikkhitto. Tathā ceva taṃ amhehi tattha tattha vibhāvitaṃ. Etanti ‘‘rūpaṃ aparinipphannaṃ, dukkhaññeva parinipphanna’’nti yadetaṃ tayā vuttaṃ, etaṃ no vata re vattabbe. Kasmā? Rūpassa ca dukkhattā. Rūpañhi aniccaṃ dukkhādhiṭṭhānañca. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yadaniccaṃ taṃ dukkhaṃ. Saṃkhittena pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhā’’ti ca.
917-918.“无常等等性质”意谓从无常诸行依缘生起开始的诸法性质。此处意谓“苦谛本质”乃询问已完,而非苦谛本体的测度,这意蕴为“非唯一第一圣谛即苦谛”。故此,即使有人否认色法等诸处界的缘起存在,也应了解其由苦谛所含摄。因何故?因即使他处非以苦为谛,唯有以苦谛涵摄从集谛起灭而得的苦谛正理。此即表示“非仅仅是第一圣谛的苦谛”。此理否认“无依止”的说法,故谓色等根界受等境界皆以集谛相应而共同缘起。何为“超俗”?谓之以超越世间的苦灭谛之道理。若依目前逻辑应知,当如何修证?这一切即是反驳他论者的本质,辩证清楚。所以此说“色未完全起显,此时苦苦方显”的说法,并非应当采信。何故?因色法本质即为苦,色乃无常苦之所依止,故说“无常则苦,约言五取蕴皆苦”。
Aparinipphannakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 未完成论说之注释已完。
Tevīsatimavaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. · 二十三品之注释已完。
Kathāvatthupakaraṇa-anuṭīkā samattā. · 《论事》复注已圆满。
Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa · 礼敬彼世尊、阿拉汉、正自觉者